Menu

Galatians 2:2 — Word Study

Depth

N1904ἀνέβην δὲ κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν καὶ ἀνεθέμην αὐτοῖς τὸ εὐαγγέλιον κηρύσσω ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν, κατ᾽ ἰδίαν δὲ τοῖς δοκοῦσιν, μή πως εἰς κενὸν τρέχω ἔδραμον.

BSAI went upanabainō nowde according tokata a revelationapokalupsis [divine, supernatural, from God, a disclosure of truth] andkai set beforeanatithēmi themautos theho gospeleuangelion [good news, message of salvation] thathos, hē I proclaimkērussō [proclaim, herald] amongen theho Gentiles —ethnos [non-Jewish people, nations] apartkata privatelyidios [in a personal, confidential manner] howeverde to thoseho esteemed —dokeō [esteemed, respected] lest perhaps ineis vainkenos [without result, to no purpose] I may be runningtrechō [striving, laboring] orē have run.trechō [exerted effort, toiled]

Word
Listen & take awayGalatians 2
English ↓ Download MP3 The Berean Standard Bible chapter audio already hosted for the site's Bible section — verse 2 is in this chapter.
Greek ↓ Download MP3 Nestle 1904 — the very text on this page — read by Andy Martin in Erasmian pronunciation.
Say the word Each Greek word carries its transliteration (trechō) — no per-word recordings of the Greek exist to link to.
Take it away
Galatians 2:2quick helps
In a sentencePaul recounts his visit to Jerusalem, emphasizing the importance of the gospel he preaches and his concern over its reception.
Who is speakingThe apostle Paul, addressing the Galatians about his ministry.
Where we areIn a narrative about Paul's early ministry, specifically his interactions with the church leaders.
The hard wordἀποκάλυψις
Take awayPaul's efforts are driven by divine revelation, and he seeks validation from the church leaders.
8 commentators on this verse Gill, Jamieson, Poole, Trapp & more — read them › clause verbἀναβαίνω The sentence as the grammar sees it Open the tree ›
How rare are these words?in the New Testament

Every word here is used elsewhere in the New Testament.

Bars are logarithmic — , the commonest word in the Greek New Testament, stands 19,867 times, so a linear scale would leave everything else invisible. Click a row to open that word.

Deep Study — Galatians 2:2

Sections marked generated are written from the data on this page rather than by a named author. Everything else — the lexicon entries, the cross references, the manuscript readings, the counts — is quoted from its source unchanged.

Context — Paul's Visit to Jerusalemgenerated

1Fourteen years later I went up again to Jerusalem, accompanied by Barnabas. I took Titus along also.
2I went in response to a revelation and set before them the gospel that I preach among the Gentiles. But I spoke privately to those recognized as leaders, for fear that I was running or had already run in vain.
3Yet not even Titus, who was with me, was compelled to be circumcised, even though he was a Greek.
4This issue arose because some false brothers had come in under false pretenses to spy on our freedom in Christ Jesus, in order to enslave us.

Galatians 2:2 describes Paul's journey to Jerusalem, motivated by a revelation from God. He presented the gospel he preaches to the Gentiles to the leaders of the church. This visit was crucial for confirming the authenticity and acceptance of his message among the early Christian community. Paul expresses concern that his efforts might be in vain, highlighting the importance of his mission and the need for unity in the church.


Cross References

ReferenceText (BSB)
1Acts 16:9–10During the night, Paul had a vision of a man of Macedonia standing and pleading with him, “Come over to Macedonia and help us.”
2Acts 18:9One night the Lord spoke to Paul in a vision: “Do not be afraid; keep on speaking; do not be silent.
3Acts 23:11The following night the Lord stood near Paul and said, “Take courage! As you have testified about Me in Jerusalem, so also you must testify in Rome.”
4Galatians 2:9And recognizing the grace that I had been given, James, Cephas, and John—those reputed to be pillars—gave me and Barnabas the right hand of fellowship, so that we should go to the Gentiles, and they to the circumcised.
5Galatians 1:16to reveal His Son in me so that I might preach Him among the Gentiles, I did not rush to consult with flesh and blood,

The Key Word ἀποκάλυψις, apokalupsisgenerated

The word ἀποκάλυψις (*apokalupsis*) is a noun meaning 'revelation' or 'uncovering'. It refers to the act of making something known that was previously hidden, particularly divine truths. In this context, it emphasizes that Paul's visit was prompted by a direct communication from God.

This revelation is significant as it underscores the divine authority behind Paul's ministry and the gospel he preaches. It shows that his actions are not merely based on human initiative but are guided by God's will.


How Translations Differ — measured against the Berean Standard Biblegenerated

In the Berean Standard Bible, the word ἀποκάλυψιν is rendered as a revelation, while the American Standard Version and others use revelation. The translations agree on the meaning of the word.

The term ἀνεθέμην is translated as set before in the BSB and laid before in the ASV. This reflects a slight variation in wording but maintains the same essential meaning.


Sentence Structuregenerated

The main verb of the verse is ἀνέβην, I went up, which governs the entire sentence. It is followed by a prepositional phrase indicating the reason for the journey and a noun phrase that specifies what Paul presented.

The structure includes clauses that detail Paul's actions and intentions, with subordinate phrases providing additional context about his audience and concerns.


Septuagint Backgroundgenerated

ἀποκάλυψις does not appear in the Septuagint, but it is related to the Hebrew word גָּלָה (H1540), which means to uncover or reveal. This connection emphasizes the theme of divine revelation present in both the Old and New Testaments.

The concept of revelation is central to understanding God's communication with humanity, as seen in both the Hebrew Scriptures and the New Testament.


In plain words — the whole versegenerated

Galatians 2:2 tells us that Paul went to Jerusalem because of a revelation from God. He presented the gospel he preaches to the Gentiles to the church leaders privately, concerned that his efforts might be in vain. This highlights the importance of his mission and the need for unity in the early church.


Frequently Asked Questionsgenerated

What does Paul mean by 'a revelation'?

Paul refers to a divine communication from God that guided his actions and ministry, indicating that his mission is rooted in God's will.

Why did Paul speak privately to the leaders?

Paul spoke privately to ensure that there was no misunderstanding about his message and to seek their validation without public pressure.

What is the significance of the gospel Paul preaches?

The gospel Paul preaches is the message of salvation through Jesus Christ, which is intended for the Gentiles and is central to his ministry.

What does it mean to run in vain?

To run in vain means to put in effort without achieving the intended result, highlighting Paul's concern for the effectiveness of his ministry.


Reflection Questionsgenerated

  1. How can I discern God's revelations in my own life?
  2. What steps can I take to ensure my efforts in sharing the gospel are effective?
  3. In what ways can I support leaders in the church as Paul sought validation from them?
  4. How do I respond when I feel my efforts are in vain?

The early church on this verse — how the Fathers read it

Several early church Fathers reference this verse to discuss the nature of Paul's ministry and the importance of the gospel he preached.

Polycarp of SmyrnaEpistle to the Philippians 9 c. 69–155
I exhort you all, therefore, to yield obedience to the word of righteousness, and to exercise all patience, such as ye have seen [set] before your eyes, not only in the case of the blessed Ignatius, and Zosimus, and Rufus,
Early Church Fathers on Galatians 2 →
TertullianAgainst Marcion Book IV c. 155–220
There would be still wanted that Gospel which St. Paul found in existence, to which he yielded his belief, and with which he so earnestly wished his own to agree,
Early Church Fathers on Galatians 2 →
TertullianAgainst Marcion Book V c. 155–220
For their rudimentary belief, which was still in suspense about the observance of the law, deserved this concessive treatment, when even the apostle himself had some suspicion that he might have run, and be still running, in vain.
Early Church Fathers on Galatians 2 →

Commentators on this verse — 8 expositors, verse by verse

Each of these wrote on Galatians 2:2 itself, not merely on the chapter around it.

John Gill1697–1771Gill's Exposition of the Entire Bible

And I went up by revelation,.... He was not sent for by the apostles at Jerusalem, nor did he go of himself, nor only by the vote of the church at Antioch, but by a divine revelation; not a

Read John Gill on Galatians 2 →
Robert Jamieson1802–1880Jamieson, Fausset, and Brown's Commentary

And I went up by revelation, and communicated unto them that gospel which I preach among the Gentiles, but privately to them which were of reputation, lest by any means I should run, or had run, in vain. By revelation.

Read Robert Jamieson on Galatians 2 →
Matthew Poole1624–1679Matthew Poole's Commentary on the Holy Bible

And I went up by revelation; revelation signifieth God’ s immediate declaration of his will to him, that he would have him take this journey; which is not at all contradicted by Luke, saying, ,3, that their journey was determined by the Christians at Antioch. God, to encourage Paul, had let him know it was his will he should go; and also put it into the Christians’ hearts at Antioch, to choose him to the journey. His motions from one place to another were much by revelation, or immediate order and command from God, 23:11. And communicated unto them that gospel which I preach among the Gentiles; he saith, he communicated, or made a report or relation of, , that doctrine of the gospel which…

Read Matthew Poole on Galatians 2 →
John Trapp1601–1669Trapp's Complete Commentary on the Old and New Testaments

2 And I went up by revelation, and communicated unto them that gospel which I preach among the Gentiles, but privately to them which were of reputation, lest by any means I should run, or had run, in vain. Ver. 2. By revelation] i.e. By God’ s special direction; for he ordereth a good man’ s goings, Psalms 37:23. I communicated unto them] ανεθεμην, I laid open the matter freely and familiarly, as unto bosom friends. But privately] For all good men are not fit to be trusted with secrets, but only such as can both keep counsel and give counsel. Or had run in vain] Lest, if it should be thought that I had not held good correspondence with those other apostles, I might lose the fruit of my…

Read John Trapp on Galatians 2 →
Charles John Ellicott1819–1905Ellicott's Commentary for English Readers

(2) By revelation.—Revelations seem to have been vouchsafed to the Apostle in various ways—most frequently in dreams or nocturnal visions (Acts 16:9; Acts 18:9; Acts 23:11; Acts 27:23), but also in a state of trance (Acts 22:17), and through other undefined modes of intimation (Acts 16:6-7; Acts 20:22-23). By what particular form of revelation he was guided in this instance does not appear. It would seem that this inward spiritual guidance granted privately to the Apostle coincided with a formal commission from the Church at Antioch (Acts 15:2), which, as the external and apparent side of the transaction, is naturally related by the historian, while it is just as naturally omitted by the…

Read Charles John Ellicott on Galatians 2 →
AdamClarkeAdam Clarke's Commentary on the Bible

Verse 2. I went up by revelation] This either means, that he went up at that time by an express revelation from God that it was his duty to do so, made either to the Church of Antioch to send these persons to Jerusalem, or to these persons to go according to the directions of that Church; or the apostle here wishes to say, that, having received the Gospel by revelation from God, to preach Christ among the Gentiles, he went up according to that revelation, and told what God had done by him among the Gentiles: or it may refer to the revelation made to certain prophets who came to Antioch, and particularly Agabus, who signified by the Spirit that there would be a dearth; in consequence of…

Read AdamClarke on Galatians 2 →
CambridgeThe Cambridge Bible for Schools and Colleges

2. by revelation] In the Acts no mention is made of this divine intimation. It would seem to have been concurrent with the external commission from the Church. The account of this visit is not contradictory to, or even inconsistent with St Luke’s narrative in Acts 15. They supplement one another. “The account of the Acts is fuller; that of the Galatians only brings out the chief points. Luke, in keeping with the documentary character of the Acts, gives us the public transactions of the Council at Jerusalem; Paul taking a knowledge of these for granted, shortly alludes to his private conference and agreement with the Apostles. Both together give us a complete history of that remarkable…

Read Cambridge on Galatians 2 →
Albert Barnes1798–1870Barnes' Notes on the Bible

And I went up by revelation - Not for the purpose of receiving instruction from the apostles there in regard to the nature of the Christian religion.

Read Albert Barnes on Galatians 2 →

The verse in English, compared — 16 translations, and where they part company

Every translation on this page is a decision someone had to make and commit to. Read down a column and you see one translator's judgement; read across a row and you see the range the Greek actually allows. The BSB is the wording the rest of this page is measured against, so it is listed first.

Modern formal

BSBBerean Standard Bible2020

I went in response to a revelation and set before them the gospel that I preach among the Gentiles. But I spoke privately to those recognized as leaders, for fear that I was running or had already run in vain.

WEBWorld English Bible2000

I went up by revelation, and I laid before them the Good News which I preach among the Gentiles, but privately before those who were respected, for fear that I might be running, or had run, in vain.

MSBMajority Standard Bible2022

I went in response to a revelation and set before them the gospel that I preach among the Gentiles. But I spoke privately to those recognized as leaders, for fear that I was running or had already run in vain.

NETBNew English Translation2006

I went there because of a revelation and presented to them the gospel that I preach among the Gentiles. But I did so only in a private meeting with the influential people, to make sure that I was not running – or had not run – in vain.

Tyndale line

KJVKing James Version1611

And I went up by revelation, and communicated unto them that gospel which I preach among the Gentiles, but privately to them which were of reputation, lest by any means I should run, or had run, in vain.

ASVAmerican Standard Version1901

And I went up by revelation; and I laid before them the gospel which I preach among the Gentiles but privately before them who were of repute, lest by any means I should be running, or had run, in vain.

RVARevised Version, American1894

And I went up by revelation; and I laid before them the gospel which I preach among the Gentiles, but privately before them who were of repute, lest by any means I should be running, or had run, in vain.

NWBWebster's Bible1833

And I went by revelation, and communicated to them that gospel which I preach among the Gentiles, but privately to them who were of reputation, lest by any means I should run, or had run in vain.

GNVGeneva Bible1599

And I went vp by reuelation, and declared vnto them that Gospel which I preach among the Gentiles, but particularly to them that were the chiefe, least by any meanes I should runne, or had runne in vaine:

Strictly literal

DBYDarby Translation1890

and I went up according to revelation, and I laid before them the glad tidings which I preach among the nations, but privately to those conspicuous [among them], lest in any way I run or had run in vain;

YLTYoung's Literal Translation1862

and I went up by revelation, and did submit to them the good news that I preach among the nations, and privately to those esteemed, lest in vain I might run or did run;

LSVLiteral Standard Version2020

and I went up by revelation, and submitted the good news to them that I preach among the nations, and privately to those esteemed, lest I ran or might run in vain;

ULBUnlocked Literal Bible2017

I went up because of a revelation and set before them the gospel that I proclaim among the Gentiles. I spoke privately to those who seemed to be important, in order to make sure that I was not running—or had not run—in vain.

From the Latin

DRADouay-Rheims (Challoner)1899

And I went up according to revelation; and communicated to them the gospel, which I preach among the Gentiles, but apart to them who seemed to be some thing: lest perhaps I should run, or had run in vain.

Simplified

FBVFree Bible Version2020

I went because of what God had shown me. I met with the recognized church leaders there in private and explained to them the good news I was sharing with the foreigners. I didn't want the course I had followed, and what I was working so hard for, to come to nothing.

BBEBible in Basic English1949

And I went up by revelation; and I put before them the good news which I was preaching among the Gentiles, but privately before those who were of good name, so that the work which I was or had been doing might not be without effect.

Word by word, the decisions they made

ἀποκάλυψινapokalupsis a revelation G602 2 different renderings
revelationASV BBE DBY DRA KJV LSV NWB RVA WEB YLT
a revelationBSB MSB NETB ULB
ἀνεθέμηνanatithēmi set before G394 2 different renderings
laid beforeASV DBY RVA WEB
set beforeBSB MSB ULB
εὐαγγέλιονeuangelion gospel G2098 3 different renderings
gospelASV BSB DRA GNV KJV MSB NETB NWB RVA ULB
good newsBBE FBV LSV WEB YLT
glad tidingsDBY
κηρύσσωkērussō I proclaim G2784 3 different renderings
preachASV BSB DBY DRA GNV KJV LSV MSB NETB NWB RVA WEB YLT
i proclaimULB
preachingBBE
ἔθνεσιν,ethnos Gentiles — G1484 2 different renderings
the gentilesASV BBE BSB DRA GNV KJV MSB NETB NWB RVA ULB WEB
nationsDBY LSV YLT
ἰδίανidios privately G2398 2 different renderings
privatelyASV BBE BSB DBY KJV LSV MSB NWB RVA ULB WEB YLT
privateFBV NETB

Counted from the translations carried on this site, not from a survey of every English Bible. A rendering shared by many versions is usually inherited rather than independently arrived at — the Tyndale line in particular runs through most of them.


The sentence as the grammar sees it — from the Nestle 1904 treebank

This is not our own analysis: it is the scholarly syntax tree for the verse, showing how the clause actually holds together.

clauseδὲnowclauseverbἀνέβηνI went upprepositional phrase · adverbialκατὰaccording toἀποκάλυψινa revelationclauseκαὶandclauseclauseverbἀνεθέμηνset beforeindirect objectαὐτοῖςthemnoun phrase · objectτὸthenoun phraseεὐαγγέλιονgospelclauseobjectthatverbκηρύσσωI proclaimprepositional phrase · adverbialἐνamongnoun phraseτοῖςtheἔθνεσινGentilesδὲhoweverclauseprepositional phrase · adverbialκατ’apartἰδίανindividuallynoun phrase · indirect objectτοῖςto thoseclauseverbδοκοῦσινesteemedclauseμήlestclauseπωςhardlyclauseprepositional phrase · adverbialεἰςinκενὸνvainverb phrase · verbτρέχωI should be runningorἔδραμονhave run

Boxes are the grammarian's groupings — clause, noun phrase, prepositional phrase.


The earliest translations — Latin and Syriac

Every translation is an argument about meaning made by someone who had to commit to one. These two were made while the Greek was still a living language, and they are the oldest opinions we have about what this verse says.

Latin VulgateAD 382–405

Ascendi autem secundum revelationem : et contuli cum illis Evangelium, quod prædico in gentibus, seorsum autem iis qui videbantur aliquid esse : ne forte in vacuum currerem, aut cucurrissem.

Jerome revised the Old Latin against the Greek from AD 382; the Latin west read this text for a thousand years.

Syriac Peshittaby AD 400

ܣܠܩܬ ܕܝܢ ܒܓܠܝܢܐ ܘܓܠܝܬ ܠܗܘܢ ܣܒܪܬܐ ܕܡܟܪܙ ܐܢܐ ܒܥܡܡܐ ܘܚܘܝܬܗ ܠܐܝܠܝܢ ܕܡܣܬܒܪܝܢ ܗܘܘ ܕܡܕܡ ܐܝܬܝܗܘܢ ܒܝܢܝ ܘܠܗܘܢ ܕܡ ܣܪܝܩܐܝܬ ܪܗܛܬ ܐܘ ܪܗܛ ܐܢܐ

The Bible of the Syriac-speaking church, in the language nearest to the Aramaic Jesus spoke.

Shown verse by verse rather than word by word: aligning a Greek word to its Latin or Syriac counterpart automatically would be guesswork, and a wrong alignment is worse than none.


The Greek editions compared — what the manuscripts actually say

Eight printed editions of the Greek New Testament, side by side. Where they agree the wording is settled; where a word is missing from an edition it is marked, so you can see the difference rather than take it on trust.

Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

ἀνέβην δὲ κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν καὶ ἀνεθέμην αὐτοῖς τὸ εὐαγγέλιον κηρύσσω ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν, κατ᾽ ἰδίαν δὲ τοῖς δοκοῦσιν, μή πως εἰς κενὸν τρέχω ἔδραμον.

The standard critical text of the New Testament.

Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

ἀνέβην δὲ κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν καὶ ἀνεθέμην αὐτοῖς τὸ εὐαγγέλιον κηρύσσω ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν, κατ᾽ ἰδίαν δὲ τοῖς δοκοῦσιν, μή πως εἰς κενὸν τρέχω ἔδραμον.

The previous edition, still widely cited.

SBL Greek New Testament2010 · Michael Holmes

ἀνέβην δὲ κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν καὶ ἀνεθέμην αὐτοῖς τὸ εὐαγγέλιον κηρύσσω ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν, κατ᾽ ἰδίαν δὲ τοῖς δοκοῦσιν, μή πως εἰς κενὸν τρέχω ἔδραμον.

The Society of Biblical Literature edition, freely licensed.

Westcott–Hort1881 · Westcott and Hort

ἀνέβην δὲ κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν καὶ ἀνεθέμην αὐτοῖς τὸ εὐαγγέλιον κηρύσσω ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν, κατ᾽ ἰδίαν δὲ τοῖς δοκοῦσιν, μή πως εἰς κενὸν τρέχω ἔδραμον.

The edition that turned scholarship toward the earliest manuscripts.

Tregelles1857–1879 · Samuel Prideaux Tregelles

ἀνέβην δὲ κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν καὶ ἀνεθέμην αὐτοῖς τὸ εὐαγγέλιον κηρύσσω ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν, κατ᾽ ἰδίαν δὲ τοῖς δοκοῦσιν, μή πως εἰς κενὸν τρέχω ἔδραμον.

An independent critical text built from the oldest witnesses then known.

Tyndale House Greek NT2017 · Tyndale House, Cambridge

ἀνέβην δὲ κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν καὶ ἀνεθέμην αὐτοῖς τὸ εὐαγγέλιον κηρύσσω ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν, κατ᾽ ἰδίαν δὲ τοῖς δοκοῦσιν, μή πως εἰς κενὸν τρέχω ἔδραμον.

A recent critical edition following documentary evidence closely.

Byzantine majority text2018 · Robinson–Pierpont

ἀνέβην δὲ κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν καὶ ἀνεθέμην αὐτοῖς τὸ εὐαγγέλιον κηρύσσω ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν, κατ᾽ ἰδίαν δὲ τοῖς δοκοῦσιν, μή πως εἰς κενὸν τρέχω ἔδραμον.

The reading of the majority of surviving manuscripts.

Textus Receptus1550/1894 lineage

ἀνέβην δὲ κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν καὶ ἀνεθέμην αὐτοῖς τὸ εὐαγγέλιον κηρύσσω ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν, κατ᾽ ἰδίαν δὲ τοῖς δοκοῦσιν, πως εἰς κενὸν τρέχω ἔδραμον.

The printed tradition behind the King James Version.

Every witness on this verse they differ
Critical editions
Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993SBL Greek New Testament2010Westcott–Hort1881Tregelles1857–1879Tyndale House Greek NT2017
Byzantine / Majority
Byzantine majority text2018
Received Text
Textus Receptus1550/1894

A witness that read differently would show its variant word here, marked.

Word by word, across the editions

WordEditions carrying itMissing from
μή lestNA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, Treg, ByzTR

The map of this verse — what each word keeps company with

This is a map of two things, both counted rather than judged. Company kept: which words stand within three words of each of these, anywhere in the Greek New Testament — the thicker the line, the more often the pair meet compared with chance. Built from: the words a word is made out of, taken from its own Strong’s entry. It is not a map of meaning: nothing here claims two words mean the same thing. Click any circle to see the numbers behind it.

Galatians 2:2ἀναβαίνωI went upI went upἀναβαίνωδέnownowδέκατάaccording taccording toκατάἀποκάλυψιςa revelatioa revelationἀποκάλυψιςκαίandandκαίἀνατίθημιset beforeset beforeἀνατίθημιαὐτόςthemthemαὐτόςthetheεὐαγγέλιονgospelgospelεὐαγγέλιονὅςthatthatὅςκηρύσσωI proclaimI proclaimκηρύσσωἐνamongamongἐνthetheἔθνοςGentiles —Gentiles —ἔθνοςκατάapartapartκατάἴδιοςprivatelyprivatelyἴδιοςδέhoweverhoweverδέto thoseto thoseδοκέωesteemed —esteemed —δοκέωμήlestlestμήπωςperhapsperhapsπωςεἰςininεἰςκενόςvainvainκενόςτρέχωI may be ruI may be runninτρέχωororτρέχωhave run.have run.τρέχωἀνάPrep. and,Prep. and, apieἀνάἀποκαλύπτωv. I uncovv. I uncover, bἀποκαλύπτωεὐαγγελίζωv. I bringv. I bring goodεὐαγγελίζωεἴωθαv. I am acv. I am accustoεἴωθαθρίξn.f. a hain.f. a hairθρίξδρόμοςn.m. a runn.m. a running,δρόμοςἀήρn.m. airn.m. airἀήρἑαυτοῦRefl.pr. hRefl.pr. himselἑαυτοῦArticle thArticle theοὗAdv where,Adv where, whitοὗεἰςPrep. intoPrep. into, in,εἰςἐκPrep. fromPrep. from out,ἐκδείκνυμιv. I pointv. I point out,δείκνυμιοὐNeg.prt. nNeg.prt. no, noοὐἤδηAdv now, aAdv now, alreadἤδηἤπερDisj.prt. Disj.prt. thanἤπερἹεροσόλυμαn.f. & n.nn.f. & n.n. JerἹεροσόλυμαὄναρn.indcl. an.indcl. a dreaὄναρ
meets it a little oftener than chancemeets it far oftener than chancebuilt from the same roottwo words of the verse share ita word of this versea related word

Lexicons — every word in Galatians 2:2

One dossier per word, with every reference work grouped by kind — Greek lexicons, morphology, Bible dictionaries, topical chains and the English of the translators themselves. The verse sits at the head of each block with the word under study lit, so you never lose your place. The panel above gives the short answer; this is the long one, and it is the part of the page worth indexing.

Every entry below is the lexicographer's own text. Imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, the full Liddell-Scott-Jones, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate LSJ, Robinson and Packard on the Greek, Webster and Cawdrey on the English the translators were using. Where a cell says a work has no entry, that work genuinely has none for this word.

I went up now according to a revelation and set before them the gospel that I proclaim among the Gentiles — apart privately however to those esteemed — lest perhaps in vain I may be running or have run.
ἀνέβηνanabainō I went up G305 Verb · second aorist · active · indicative · first person · singular
81× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Galatians as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To ascend or go up, as in Matthew 20:17 and Luke 19:4. It can be physical, like climbing a tree, or metaphorical, like rising to a challenge. Ascending can also refer to spiritual growth or development.
Tyndale gloss
to ascend
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἀναβαίνω (i.e., *anabaino*) means to go up or ascend, applicable to both people and things. It covers a range of uses, such as climbing, embarking on a ship, and even metaphorical rises like thoughts or prayers. The New Testament uses it in contexts like ascending to Jerusalem (Mt 20:17) and rising smoke (Rev 8:4).

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἀναβαίνω,

[in LXX chiefly for עלה;]

to go up, ascend,

of persons: ἐπί συκομωρέαν, Lk 19:4; εἰς τ. πλοῖον, Mk 6:51; εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα, Mt 20:17; εἰς τ. ἱερόν, c. inf. (M, Pr., 205), Lk 18:10; with mention of place of departure, Mt 3:16 (ἀπό), Ac 8:39 (ἐκ);

of things, to rise, spring up, come up: a fish, Mt 17:27; smoke, Re 8:4; plants growing, Mt…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀνα-βαίνω ; [impf. ἀνέβαινον Acts iii. 1; fut. ἀναβήσομαι Ro. x. 6, after Deut. xxx. 12]; pf. ἀναβέβηκα; 2 aor. ἀνέβην, ptcp. ἀναβάς, impy. avaBa Rey. iv. 1 (ἀνάβηθι Lehm.), plur. ἀνάβατε (for RG ἀνάβητε) Rev. xi. 12 L TTr[ WH; cf. WH. App. p. 168°]; W. §14, 1h.; [B. 54 (47); fr. Hom. down]; Sept. for 1225 a. to gu up, move to a higher place, ascend: a tree (emi), Lk. xix. 4; upon the roof of a house (ἐπί), Lk. v. 19; into a ship (eis), Mk. vi. 51; [Mt. xv. 39 GTrtxt.; Acts xxi. 6 Tdf.]; εἰς τὸ ὄρος, Mt. v. 1; Lk. ix. 28; MK. iii. 13; εἰς τὸ ὑπερῷον, Acts i. 13; εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν, Ro. x. 6; Rey. xi. 12; εἰς τὸν οὐρ. is omitted, but to be supplied, in Jn. i. 51 (52) ; vi. 62, and in the phrase ava. πρὸς τὸν πατέρα, Jn. xx. 17. (it is commonly maintained that those persons are fig. said ἀναβεβηκέναι eis τὸν οὐρανόν, who have penetrated the heavenly mysteries: Jn. iii. 13, cf. Deut. xxx. 12…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀναβαίνω. Wilcken (Archiv v. p. 268), commenting on POxy VI. 898% !8 (A.D. 123) eis "Oacw καταβῆναι--ἀναβάντα εἰς τὸν ᾿Οξυρυγχείτην, notes that this may either be literal or refer to Oxyrhynchus as the county town: ἀναβαίνειν εἰς πόλιν, καταβαίνειν εἰς κώμην. P Par 49 (B.c. 164-58) gives us instances of the verb as used in NT for ‘‘ going up” to the Temple : 1. 53 otk ἔχω σχολὴν ἀναβῆναι πρὸς ὑμᾶς (sc. the recluses in the Serapeum), 26. *4 ἐὰν ἀναβῶ κἀγὼ προσκυνῆσαι. So P Par 4719f (c. B.C. 153) 6 στρατηγὸς avaβαίνει αὔριον εἰς τὸ Σαραπιῆν. Witkowski (2 p. 72) remarks

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀναβαίνω (anabainō) — to ascend.

ἀναβαίνω,

imperfect ἀνέβαινον: future -βήσομαι: (for aorist 1 see infr. B): aorist 2 ἀνέβην, imperative ἀνάβηθι, -βῶ, -βῆναι, -βάς: perfect -βέβηκα:— middle, aorist 1 -εβησάμην, Epic dialect 3rd.pers.singular -εβήσετο, see infr. B:—passive, see below 11.2:— go up, mount, with accusative loci, οὐρανόν, ὑπερώϊα ἀ. go up to heaven, to the upper rooms, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; φάτις ἀνθρώπους ἀναβαίνει goes up among, [Refs]; more frequently with preposition, ἀ. εἰς ἐλάτην, ἐς δίφρον, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; rarely with ἀνά repeated, ἀν᾽ ὀρσοθύρην ἀ.[Refs 8th c.BC+] to trample on the dead, [Refs 8th c.BC+]

II. Special usages:

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀναβαίνω

anabaino

from 303 and the base of 939; to go up (literally or

figuratively):--arise, ascend (up), climb (go, grow, rise, spring) up,

come (up).

see GREEK for 303

see GREEK for 939

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀναβαίνω

v.

I go up, mount, ascend

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀναβαίνω anabainō 82x

to go up, ascend, Mt. 5:1; to climb, Lk. 19:4; to go on board, Mk. 6:51; to rise, mount upwards, as smoke, Rev. 8:4; to grow or spring up, as plants, Mt. 13:7; to spring up, arise, as thoughts, Lk. 24:38

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀναβαίνω to go up, mount, to go up to, c. acc. loci, Hom.; φάτις ἀνθρώπους ἀναβαίνει a report goes up among men, Od.; with a prep., ἀν. ἐς δίφρον Il.; ἀν. ἐπὶ οὔρεα Hdt.:—c. dat. to trample on, Il.:— c. acc. cogn., ἀν. στόλον to go up on an expedition, Pind.

Special usages:

to mount a ship, go on board, embark, Hom.; ἐς Τροίην ἀν. to embark for Troy, Od., etc.

to mount on horseback, ἀν. ἐφ᾽ ἵππον, ἐφ᾽ ἵππου Xen.; absol., ἀναβεβηκώς mounted, id. Xen.

of land-journeys, to go up from the coast into Central Asia, Hdt., Xen.; cf. ἀνάβασις 1. 2.

of rivers, to rise, Hdt.; ἀν. ἐς τὰς ἀρούρας to overflow the fields, id. Hdt.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-2AAI-1S — Verb · second aorist · active · indicative · first person · singular
second aorist active indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-2AAI-1S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: second Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: first Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
16%went up
went up16% · 13×he went up7% · 6×going up6% · 5×having gone up6% · 5×i went up4% · 3×do come up4% · 3×ascending4% · 3×we go up4% · 3×other renderings50% · 41×

82 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 41 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb96%adverbial3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 81 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
ἸουδαῖοςJewishἄκανθαa thorn-bushΓαλιλαίαGalilee
δέbut, on the other ha
ὅτεwhenμέλλωI am about toὡςas, like as, how
Article the
καίand, even, also,ἐκθηρίονa wild beast, an
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,καπνόςsmoke
ὄχλοςa crowd
Article the
ἀναβαίνωI went up81×
what comes after →
εἰς
Article theἹεροσόλυμαJerusalemἹεροσόλυμαProp
Article the
ἄκανθαa thorn-bushὄχλοςa crowdἀδελφόςa brother
ἐκ
Article the
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐξάνωI cause to increγίνομαιI come into beinκαταβαίνωI go down, come
ἐπί
Article theσυκομορέαa sycamore tree

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀναβαίνω · 81× in the New Testament
Acts John Revelation Luke Matthew Mark Ephesians Galatians 1 Corinthians Romans
Across the New Testament10 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 249 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 2.91c. AD 40

εἰ δὲ μή, ἀδείας καὶ ἐξουσίας λαβόμενα μέχρι τῆς ψυχικῆς ἀκροπόλεως ἀναβάντα πᾶσαν ἐκπολιορκήσει καὶ λεηλατήσει τυράννου τρόπον τὴν ψυχήν.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.77c. AD 75–95

λάρνακα τετράστεγον κατασκευάσας πηχῶν τὸ μῆκος τριακοσίων πεντήκοντα δὲ τὸ πλάτος καὶ τριάκοντα τὸ βάθος, εἰς ταύτην σὺν τῇ μητρὶ τῶν παίδων καὶ ταῖς τούτων γυναιξὶν ἀνέβη, τά τε ἄλλα ὅσα πρὸς τὰς χρείας ἐπικουρήσειν αὐτοῖς ἔμελλεν ἐνθέμενος, ζῷά…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 11.11c. AD 100

τοῦτο λέγει ὅτι ἡμεῖς μὲν καταβαίνομεν εἰς τὸ ὕδωρ γέμοντες ἁμαρτιῶν καὶ ῥύπου, καὶ ἀναβαίνομεν καρποφοροῦντες ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ τὸν φόβον καὶ τὴν ἐλπίδα εἰς τὸν Ἰησοῦν ἐν τῷ πνεύματι ἔχοντες.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 1st c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC

σιτολόγον ἐπιμελῶς, τὴν ἀσφαλὴν φάσιν γνούς, μετένεγκον ἐξαυτῆς τὰ κτήνη εἰς τὴν πόλιν καὶ ἀναβαίνων ἀνένεγκον σαγὰς τρεῖς καὶ μανδάκας τρεῖς καὶ τὰ σφαιρώματα δύο καὶ τὴν σκάφην καὶ

O.Did. 325DidymoiAD 77–AD 92

μοι ὑπὲρ τοῦ κομονοπλαρίου σου εἰς Διὸς πόλιν καὶ οὐ πεπίστευκά σοι. ἀφ’ οὗ ἀνέβην, μετὰ Λονγίνου συνσκηνῶ. εἰς ἡμᾶς ὁ ἄνθρωπος πολεμεῖ, ὁ κομονοπλάρις σου, ψευδομαρτυρῶν. ἄσπασαι Κλήμην.

O.Did. 388DidymoiAD 110–AD 115

ν περὶ τοῦ κορασίου … φώνησον συ διὰ Διοδώρου … ατη μηνὸς ἀνέβη … λοιπὸν οὖν ὀφείλει πάλι … … ς πάλι πλήρη τὸν … οἶδας καὶ

I went up now according to a revelation and set before them the gospel that I proclaim among the Gentiles — apart privately however to those esteemed — lest perhaps in vain I may be running or have run.
δὲde now G1161 Conjunction
2,787× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Galatians as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This is a conjunction that means and, but, or then, used to connect ideas like in Matthew 1:2 and 2 Corinthians 6:15.
Tyndale gloss
then
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

δέ (de) is a post-positive particle in Greek, primarily used as a conjunction to connect clauses. It can express contrast (but, on the other hand) or continuation (and, also), and is often used to transition between ideas or to add emphasis. In the New Testament, it appears frequently in various contexts, such as contrasting statements or resuming interrupted discourse, with notable examples in Matthew and 2 Corinthians.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

δέ (before vowels δ’; on the general neglect of the elision in NT, v. WH, App., 146; Tdf., Pr., 96),

post-positive conjunctive particle;

copulative, but, in the next place, and, now (Abbott, JG, 104): Mt 1:2ff., II Co 6:15, 16, II Pe 1:5-7; in repetition for emphasis, Ro 3:21, 22, 9:30, I Co 2:6, Ga 2:2, Phl 2:8; in transition to something new, Mt 1:18 2:19, Lk 13:1, Jo 7:14, Ac 6:1, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

δέ (related to δή, as μέν to μήν, ef. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 355), a particle adversative, distinctive, disjunctive, but, moreover, (W.§ 53, 7 and 10, 2); it is much more freq. in the historical parts of the N. T. than in the other books, very rare in the Epp. of John and the Apocalypse. {On its general neglect of elision (when the next word begins with a vowel) cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 96; WH. App. Ῥ 146; W.§5,1a.; B. p.10sq.] It is used ἘΠ ΟἹ δὲ univ. by way of opposition and distinction; it is added to statements opp. to a preceding statement: ἐὰν yap ἀφῆτε... ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀφῆτε, Mt. vi. 14 sq.; ἐὰν de ὁ ὀφθαλμὸς κτλ. Mt. vi. 23; ἐλεύσονται δὲ ἡμέραι, Mk. ii. 20; it opposes persons to persons or things previously mentioned or thought of, —either with strong emphasis: ἐγὼ δέ, Mt. v. 22, 28, 32, 34, 39,44; ἡμεῖς de, 1 Co. i. 23; 2 Co. x. 13; σὺ δέ, Mt. vi. 6; ὑμεῖς δέ, Mk. viii. 29; of δὲ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

δεῖ. For the conjunctive, as in Mt 26%, cf. P Fay 109° (early i/A.D.) ἐάν σε δῇ (for δέῃ) τὸ εἱμάτιόν σου θεῖναι ἐνέχυρον. “even if you have to pawn your cloak” (Edd.). In P Tebt I. 585° (B.c. 111) we have ἐάν followed by the indicative— ἐὰν δεῖ σε συνπεσεῖν τῶι ᾿Ανικήτωι, σύνπεσαι, ‘if you must meet Anicetus, meet him” (Edd.): cf. Mayser G7. p. 325. Other examples of the verb are l’ Par 461® (B.C. 153) διὸ Kal ἡγούμενος δεῖν ἐπ᾿ ἄλλου μὲν μηθενὸς αὐτῶι διακριθῆναι» P Lille I. 267 (iii.B.c.) περὶ (corr. from πεερὶ) δὲ τούτου τοῦ μέρους δεήσει ἐπισχεῖν, P Tebt 11. 3414 (A.p. 140-1) δεήσι ἐπισταλῆναι εἰς δάνε[ι]α σπέρματα κατασπίο]ρᾶς KTA., “ΕἼ will be necessary to send on account of loans of seedcorn for the sowing,” etc., AécheZ 1001" © (Theran Doric —c. B.C. 200) no one may bring forward a proposal ὡς δεείσῃ διαλῦσαι τὸ κοινὸν εἰ τὰς θυσίας, P Flor II. 133" (A.D. 257) ἔδι μὲν ὑμᾶς μηδὲ…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

δέ (de) — then.

δέ,

but: adversative and copulative Particle,

I. answering to μέν (which see), τὴν νῦν μὲν Βοιωτίαν, πρότερον δὲ Καδμηίδα γῆν καλουμένην [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II. without preceding μέν,

II.1. adversative, expressing distinct opposition, αἰεί τοι τὰ κάκ᾽ ἐστὶ φίλα.. μαντεύεσθαι, ἐσθλὸν δ᾽ οὔτε τί πω εἶπας[Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in Prose, οὐκ ἐπὶ κακῷ, ἐλευθερώσει δέ.. [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II.2. copulative,

II.2. a in explanatory clauses, ξυνέβησαν.. τὰ μακρὰ τείχη ἑλεῖν (ἦν δὲ σταδίων μάλιστα ὀκτώ) [Refs 8th c.BC+]: when a substantive is followed by words in apposition, Ἀρισταγόρῃ τῷ Μιλησίῳ, δούλῳ δὲ ἡμετέρῳ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in answers, διπλᾶ λέγειν. —Answ. διπλᾶδ᾽ ὁρᾶν…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

δέ

de

a primary particle (adversative or continuative); but, and,

etc.:--also, and, but, moreover, now (often unexpressed in English).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

δέ

Cj.

but, on the other hand, and

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

δέ de 2x

a conjunctive particle, marking the superaddition of a clause, whether in opposition or in continuation, to what has preceded, and it may be variously rendered but, on the other hand, and, also, now, etc.; καὶ δέ, when there is a special superaddition in continuation, too, yea, etc. It sometimes is found at the commencement of the apodosis of a sentence, Acts 11:17. It serves also to mark the resumption of an interrupted discourse, 2 Cor. 2:10; Gal. 2:6

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

δέ but: conjunctive Particle, with adversative force: it commonly answers to μέν, and may often be rendered by while, whereas, on the other hand, v. μέν:— but μέν is often omitted, δέ being used merely to pass on from one thing to another; ὣς Ἀχιλεὺς θάμβησεν, θάμβησαν δὲ καὶ ἄλλοι Il.; etc.; κινεῖ κραδίην κινεῖ δὲ χόλον Eur.

δέ is often redundant,

to introduce the apodosis, where it may be rendered by then, yet, εἰ δέ κε μὴ δώωσιν, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι if they will not give it, then I will take it, Il.; so at in Lat., si tu oblitus es, at Dii meminerint Catull.

to resume after interruption caused by a parenthesis, where it may be rendered by I say, now, so then, Hdt.

POSITION of δέ: properly second, being often put between the Art. and Subst., the prep. and case.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
33%now
now33% · 974×however27% · 780×then21% · 620×and12% · 360×but5% · 154×other renderings2% · 49×

2,937 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 15 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,787 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existσύ
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςκύριοςlord, Lord, mastπεντακισχίλιοιfive thousand
εἰCond
παλαιόςold, ancient, woσύεἰμίI am, exist
εἰμίI am, exist
περιπατέωI walk, conduct ἀναπίπτωI lie down, reclμνημεῖονa tomb, sepulche
οὗτος
δίδωμιI offer, giveθεόςGod, a godπίστιςfaith, belief, t
δέnow2787×
what comes after →
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesusθεόςGod, a godκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
αὐτός
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐπί
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theσύ
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theοὗτοςἸωάννηςJohn
τὶς
Article theαὐτόςὄνομαname, character,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceδέ · 2,787× in the New Testament
Acts Luke Matthew 1 Corinthians John Mark Romans 2 Corinthians Hebrews Galatians James 1 Timothy

2 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
I went up now according to a revelation and set before them the gospel that I proclaim among the Gentiles — apart privately however to those esteemed — lest perhaps in vain I may be running or have run.
κατὰkata according to G2596 Preposition
473× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Galatians than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
According to means following or matching something. In the Bible, it's used to talk about things happening in line with God's plan or will, like in Matthew 8:32 and Mark 5:13.
Tyndale gloss
according to
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

κατά (kata) is a preposition used with the genitive and accusative cases, primarily meaning 'down' or 'against.' It indicates direction, motion, or relation, appearing in various contexts such as 'down from' (e.g., Mt 8:32) and 'against' (e.g., Mk 9:40). The word also conveys meanings like 'throughout' and 'according to.' Lexicons note its frequent use in the New Testament, with some variations in application.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

κατά (bef. a vowel κατ’, καθ’; on the freq. neglect of elision, v. Tdf., Pr., 95; WH, App., 146a),

prep. c. gen., acc.,

down, downwards.

C. gen. (WM, § 47, k; Bl., § 42, 2).

C. gen. rei, in local sense;

down, down from: Mt 8:32, Mk 5:13, Lk 8:33, I Co 11:4;

throughout (late usage; Bl., § 42, 2): κ. ὅλης κ.τ.λ., Lk 4:14 23:5, Ac 9:31 10:37;

in a peculiar adjectival phrase: ἡ κ. βάθους πτωχεία, deep or extreme poverty, II Co 8:2.

C. gen. pers., usually in hostile sense;

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

κατά, [on its neglect of elision before a vowel see Tf. Proleg. p. 95; cf. W. § 5, 1a.; B.10; WH. App. p. 1405], a preposition denoting motion or diffusion or direction from the higher to the lower; as in class. Grk., joined with the gen. and the acc. I. With the Genitive (W. § 47, k. p. 381 (357); [B. § 147, 20]); 1. prop. a. down from, down: κατὰ κατά 8 τοῦ κρημνοῦ, Mt. viii. 32; ΜΚ. v.13; Lk. viii. 33; κατέχεεν κατὰ τῆς κεφαλῆς (so that it flowed down from his head [οἷς W. 381 (357) note]; but it is more correct here to omit κατά with LT Tr WH; see καταχέω), Mk. xiv. 3; hence κατὰ κεφαλῆς (a veil hanging down from his head) ἔχων, 1 Co. xi. 4 ([Δ. V. having his head covered] cf. καταπέτασμα [or rather κάλυμμα (q. v.), but 566 ἔχω I. 1b.]). Ὁ. down upon (down into) anything: Acts xxvii. 14 [W. 381 (357) note!; ef. B.D. Am. ed. s. ν. Crete]; trop. 7 κατὰ βάθους πτωχεία reaching down…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

κατά, the favourite preposition of Polybius, by whom it is often used in place of ἐν, eis, and περί (Krebs Pra. p. 4), is also found with considerable variety of application in the NT, where it occurs 73 times c. gen., and 391 times c. acc. (cf. Proleg. p. 105). Brugmann (Awrze Vergletchende Grammazk, p. 479) considers that the earliest use of the word was “‘along ” something, so as to remain in connexion and contact with the object, and from this most of the senses found in the NT can be derived. I. (1) Turning to the construction c. gen. we find that the meaning ‘‘along” has passed into ‘‘down,” a usage not found in ΜΟΥ, in such passages as P Petr II. 18(26)!° (B.c. a ἐπιπεσὼν ἔτυπτεν [ad]t[o]v κατὰ τοῦ τραχήλου, Chest. τοῦ πνοήν: ἐξ Mt 8%, r Cor 114, 2 Cor 8%. (2) This in turn becomes ‘‘ against,” as in Mt τοῦδ, Mk 14°5, e.g. P Eleph 115 (B.c. 311-0) (= Se/ections, p. 4) ὅπου ἂν…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

κατά (kata) — according to.

κατά [κᾰτᾰ],

poetry καταί accusative to [Refs 2nd c.AD+]: preposition with genitive or accusative:— downwards.

__A WITH GEN.,

__A.I denoting motion from above, down from, βῆ δὲ κατ᾽ Οὐλύμποιο καρήνων, κατ᾽ Ἰδαίων ὀρέων, βαλέειν κ. πέτρης, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; καθ᾽ ἵππων ἀΐξαντε[Refs 5th c.BC+] — for κατ᾽ ἄκρης see.{ἄκρα}: Μοῖσα κ. στόματος Χέε νέκταρ [Refs 3rd c.BC+]

__A.II denoting downward motion,

__A.II.1 down upon or over, κ. Χθονὸς ὄμματα πήξας [Refs 8th c.BC+]; of the dying, κατὰ.. ὀφθαλμῶν κέχυτ᾽ ἀχλύς a cloud settled upon the eyes, [Refs]; φᾶρος κὰκ κεφαλῆς εἴρυσσε down over.. , [Refs 8th c.BC+]; [κόπρος] κ. σπείους κέχυτο.. πολλή [Refs]; ὕδωρ κ. Χειρός, see at {Χεί; μύρον κ. τῆς κεφαλῆς καταχέαντες} [Refs…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

κατά

kata

a primary particle; (prepositionally) down (in place or time), in

varied relations (according to the case (genitive, dative or

accusative) with which it is joined):--about, according as (to),

after, against, (when they were) X alone, among, and, X apart, (even,

like) as (concerning, pertaining to touching), X aside, at, before,

beyond, by, to the charge of, (charita-)bly, concerning, + covered,

(dai-)ly, down, every, (+ far more) exceeding, X more excellent, for,

from ... to, godly, in(-asmuch, divers, every, -to, respect of), ...

by, after the manner of, + by any means, beyond (out of) measure, X

mightily, more, X natural, of (up-)on (X part), out (of every), over

against, (+ your) X own, + particularly, so, through(-oughout,

-oughout every), thus, (un-)to(-gether, -ward), X uttermost,

where(-by), with. In composition it retains many of these

Read the full entry →
Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

κατά

Prep.

down from, against, according to, throughout, during

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

κατά kata 473x

down from, Mt. 8:32; down upon, upon, Mk. 14:3; Acts 27:14; down into; κατὰ βάθους, profound, deepest, 2 Cor. 8:2; down over, throughout a space, Lk. 4:14; 23:5; concerning, in cases of pointed allegation, 1 Cor. 15:15; against, Mt. 12:30; by, in oaths, Mt. 26:63; with an acc. of place, in the quarter of, about, near, at, Lk. 10;32; Acts 2:10; throughout, Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
45%according to
according to45% · 215×against12% · 57×in9% · 42×every5% · 24×by5% · 23×on3% · 13×other renderings15% · 72×other renderings7% · 34×

480 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 48 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial86%object5%predicate5%subject3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 473 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
καίand, even, also,πᾶςall, the whole, ἄνθρωποςa man, one of th
αὐτός
ποιέωI do, makeγυνήa woman, wife, mλαλέωI speak, say
καίand, even, also, nam
ἑκατόνIndecμέγαςσύ
οὐNeg
καίand, even, also,ἀλλάbut, exceptἔρχομαιI come, go
ἐγώ
μετάσυλλαμβάνωI seize, appreheγίνομαιI come into bein
κατάaccording to473×
what comes after →
Article the
νόμοςa law, the Mosaiἔργονwork, labor, actαὐτός
σάρξflesh, body
περιπατέωI walk, conduct ζάωI liveοὐNeg
ἴδιοςone’s own, private,
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,δέbut, on the othe
ἡμέραa day
ἐνεἰμίI am, existκαίand, even, also,
αὐτός
ὅπωςhow, in order thκαίand, even, also,λέγωI say, speak

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκατά · 473× in the New Testament
Acts Romans Luke Hebrews Matthew 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians Ephesians Mark Galatians Colossians Philippians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome The Shepherd of Hermas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 3c. AD 40

ἡ δ’ ἀρχή, καθάπερ ἔφην, ἐστὶ θαυμασιωτάτη κοσμοποιίαν περιέχουσα, ὡς καὶ τοῦ κόσμου τῷ νόμῳ καὶ τοῦ νόμου τῷ κόσμῳ συνᾴδοντος καὶ τοῦ νομίμου ἀνδρὸς εὐθὺς ὄντος κοσμοπολίτου πρὸς τὸ βούλημα τῆς φύσεως τὰς πράξεις ἀπευθύνοντος, καθ’ ἣν καὶ ὁ σύμπας…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.7c. AD 75–95

ἀλλʼ ἐπειδὴ μείζων ἦν ἡ τοῦδε τοῦ λόγου περιβολή, κατʼ αὐτὸν ἐκεῖνον χωρίσας ταῖς ἰδίαις ἀρχαῖς αὐτοῦ καὶ τῷ τέλει τὴν γραφὴν συνεμέτρησα·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 2nd c. BC 6th c. AD 3rd c. BC
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

ἐπρίατο Πετεαρσεμθεὺς Πανοβχούνιος ὡς ἐτῶν μ χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δύο . προπωλητὴς καὶ βεβαιωτὴς τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην πάντων Πετεαρσεμθεὺς ὁ ἀποδόμενος, ὃν ἐδέξατο Πετεαρσεμθεὺς ὁ πριάμενος. Ἑρμίας ὁ

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

ἐπρίατο Πακοῖβις Πατοῦτος ὡς ἐτῶν λ χαλκοῦ δραχμῶν τρισχιλίων . προπωληταὶ καὶ βεβαιωταὶ τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην πάντων Νεχούτης καὶ ὁ σὺν αὐτῷ οἱ ἀποδόμενοι, ὃν ἐδέξατο Πακοῖβις

BGU 3 1000Pathyris99 BC

μελίχρως τετανὸς μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν χαλκοῦ δραχμὰς δισχιλίας καὶ διακοσίας . προπωλητὴς καὶ βεβαιωτὴς τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην πάντων Πανοβχοῦνις ὁ ἀποδόμενος, ὃν ἐδέξατο Εὔνους ὁ πριάμενος. Ἑρμίας ὁ

I went up now according to a revelation and set before them the gospel that I proclaim among the Gentiles — apart privately however to those esteemed — lest perhaps in vain I may be running or have run.
ἀποκάλυψινapokalupsis a revelation G602 Noun · accusative · singular · feminine
18× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Galatians than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A revelation is when God discloses a truth or secret to someone. The Bible talks about revelations in Romans 8:19 and 1 Corinthians 14:6, often referring to a manifestation of God's truth.
Amplified meaning
divine, supernatural, from God, a disclosure of truth
Tyndale gloss
revelation
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἀποκάλυψις, transliterated as apokalupsis, means an uncovering or revelation, particularly of divine truths. It is derived from the verb ἀποκαλύπτω, meaning to reveal. The New Testament uses it to describe God's disclosure of spiritual mysteries, appearing in verses like Luke 2:32 and Romans 2:5. Some sources note its use in both secular and sacred contexts, while others emphasize its religious significance.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — ἀποκάλυψις, ἐπιφάνεια from a scan

᾿Αποκάλυψις is only once found in the books of the Ὁ. T. canon, namely at 1 Sam. xx. 30; and there in altogether a subordinate sense, as = ‘denudatio’; three times in the Apocrypha (Ecclus. xi. 27; xxii. 22; xli. 23); but as little 3 AA 254 SYNONYMS OF THE NEW TESTAMENT, ὃ χοιν. in this as in the other does it obtain that grander meaning which it has acquired in the N. T. In this last it is predominantly, though not exclusively, a Pauline word ; and, occurring altogether some nineteen times, being rendered once ‘coming’ (1 Cor. i. 7), once ‘manifestation’ (Rom. viii. 19), once ‘appearing’ (1 Pet. i. 7), and once ‘to lighten’ (εἰς ἀποκάλυψιν, Luke ii. 32), has always that auguster sense of an unveiling by God of Himself to his creatures, to which we have given the more Latin term, revelation. The same auguster sense the verb ἀποκαλύπτειν in the N.'T. commonly possesses; but not there for…

Read the full entry →
Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἀπο-κάλυψις, -εως, ἡ

(< ἀποκαλύπτω),

[in LXX: I Ki 20:30 (עֶרְוָה), Si 11:27 22:22 42:1*;]

an uncovering, laying bare (Plut.). Metaph., a revealing, revelation: a disclosure of divine truth, or a manifestion from God: Lk 2:32, Ro 2:5 8:19 16:25, I Co 1:7 14:6, 26, II Co 12:1, 7, Ga 1:12 2:2, Eph 1:17 3:3, II Th 1:7, I Pe 1:7, 13 4:13, Re 1:1.†

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀπο-κάλυψις, -ews, ἡ, (ἀποκαλύπτω. q. V.),an uncovering; 1. prop. a laying bare, making naked (1 S. xx. 30). 2. tropically, in N. T. and 600]. language [see end], a. a disclosure of truth, instruction, concerning divine things before unknown—esp. those relating to the Christian salvation — given to the soul by God himself, or by the ascended Christ, esp. through the operation of the Holy Spirit (1 Co. ii. 10), and so to be distinguished from other methods of instruction; hence, κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν γνωρίζεσθαι, Eph. 111. 3. πνεῦμα ἀποκαλύψεως, a spirit received from God disclosing what and how great are the benefits of salvation, Eph. i. 17, cf. 18. with gen. of the obj., rod μυστηρίου, Ro. xvi. 25. with gen. of the subj., κυρίου, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, 2 Co. xii. 1 (revelations by ecstasies and visions, [so 7]); Gal. 1. 12; Rev. i. 1 (reyelation of future things relating to the consummation of the…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀποκάλυψις. The Biblical history οἵ ἀποκάλυψις along with the foregoing verb is discussed by Milligan Thess. p. 149 ff. Jerome’s assertion (Comm. in Gal. 113) that the word “*proprie Scripturarum est; a nullo sapientum saeculi apud Graecos usurpatum” cannot, however, be substantiated, if only because of its occurrences in Plutarch, who, like the NT writers, drew from the common vocabulary of the time, see e.g. Mor. 70 F.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀποκάλυψις (apokalupsis) — revelation.

ἀπο-κάλυψις [κᾰ], εως, ἡ,

uncovering, of the head, [Refs 1st c.BC+]; disclosing, of hidden springs, [Refs 1st c.AD+]; revelation, especially of divine mysteries, [NT]; of persons, manifestation, [NT]; title of the Apocalypse.

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀποκάλυψις

apokalupsis

from 601; disclosure:--appearing, coming, lighten, manifestation, be

revealed, revelation.

see GREEK for 601

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀποκάλυψις, εως, ἡ

n.f.

an unveiling, uncovering, revealing

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀποκάλυψις apokalypsis 18x

a disclosure, revelation, Rom. 2:5; manifestation, appearance, Rom. 8:19; 1 Cor. 1:7; 2 Thess. 1:7; 1 Pet. 1:7, 13; 4:13; met. spiritual enlightenment, Lk. 2:32

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀποκάλυψις from ἀποκαλύπτω an uncovering, a revelation, NTest.: — the Apocalypse, id. NTest.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-ASF — Noun · accusative · singular · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

rev-e-la'-shun:

I. THE NATURE OF REVELATION

1. The Religion of the Bible the Only Supernatural Religion

2. General and Special Revelation

(1) Revelation in Eden

(2) Revelation among the Heathen

II. THE PROCESS OF REVELATION

1. Place of Revelation among the Redemptive Ac of God

2. Stages of Material Development

III. THE MODES OF REVELATION

1. The Several Modes of Revelation

2. Equal Supernaturalness of the Several Modes

3. The Prophet God's Mouthpiece

4. Visionary Form of Prophecy

5. "Passivity" of Prophets

6. Revelation by Inspiration

7. Complete Revelation of God in Christ

IV. BIBLICAL TERMINOLOGY

1. The Ordinary Forms

2. "Word of Yahweh" and "Torah"

3. "The Scriptures"

LITERATURE

I. The Nature of Revelation.

1. The Religion of the Bible the Only Supernatural Religion:

The religion of the Bible is a frankly supernatural religion. By this is not meant merely that, according to it, all men, as creatures, live…

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Revelation

An uncovering, a bringing to light of that which had been previously wholly hidden or only obscurely seen. God has been pleased in various ways and at different times (Heb. 1:1) to make a supernatural revelation of himself and his purposes and plans, which, under the guidance of his Spirit, has been committed to writing. (See WORD OF GOD.) The Scriptures are not merely the “record” of revelation; they are the revelation itself in a written form, in order to the accurate presevation and propagation of the truth.

Revelation and inspiration differ. Revelation is the supernatural communication of truth to the mind; inspiration (q.v.) secures to the teacher or writer infallibility in communicating that truth to others. It renders its subject the spokesman or prophet of God in such a sense that everything he asserts to be true…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

An extraordinary and supernatural disclosure made by God, whether by dream, vision, ecstasy, or otherwise, of truths beyond man’s unaided power to discover. Paul, alluding to his visions and revelations, 2Co 12:1,7, speaks of them in the third person, out of modesty; and declares that he could not tell whether he was in the body or out of the body. Elsewhere he says that he had received his gospel by a particular revelation, Ga 1:12.

For the BOOK OF REVELATION, see APOCALYPSE.

Nave's Topical Bible

→ God reveals himself to Moses Ex 3:1-6,14; 6:1-3

→ The law is revealed Ex 20; 21; 22; 23; 24; 25; 26; 27; 28; 29; 30; 31; 32; 33; 34; 35; Le 1; 2; 3; 4; 5; 6; 7

→ The pattern of the temple is revealed 1Ch 28:11-19

→ The sonship of Jesus is revealed Mt 3:17; 16:17; 17:5

→ See INSPIRATION

→ See PROPHECY

→ See PROPHET

→ See WORD OF GOD, INSPIRATION OF

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
88%revelation
revelation88% · 15×revelations12% · 2×

17 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial67%object28%predicate6%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 18 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἐνκτίσιςcreation, creatuἀπεκδέχομαιI expect eagerly
καίand, even, also, nam
ὀργήanger, wrath, paὀπτασίαa vision, supernσοφίαwisdom
κατά
Χριστόςanointed, the Meδέbut, on the otheὅτιthat, since, bec
ἐν
Disjτιμήa price, honorχάριςgrace, favor, ki
εἰς
φῶςlight, a source
ἀποκάλυψιςa revelation18×
what comes after →
Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, mastυἱόςa son, descendenδόξαhonor, renown, g
ἸησοῦςJesus
Χριστόςanointed, the Me
ἔθνοςa race, people, the
καίand, even, also,
δικαιοκρισίαjust judgment
Article the
μυστήριονanything hidden, a m
χρόνοςtime, a particul

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀποκάλυψις · 18× in the New Testament
1 Corinthians 1 Peter Romans 2 Corinthians Ephesians Galatians 2 Thessalonians Luke Revelation
Across the New Testament9 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 14 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
The Shepherd of Hermas Philo of Alexandria
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Cherubim 14c. AD 40

„στήσει“ γάρ φησιν „ὁ ἱερεὺς τὴν γυναῖκα ἐναντίον κυρίου καὶ ἀποκαλύψει τὴν κεφαλὴν αὐτῆς“ (Num.

The Shepherd of HermasThe Shepherd of Hermas 3.1.2c. AD 140

νηστεύσας πολλάκις καὶ δεηθεὶς τοῦ κυρίου, ἵνα μοι φανερώσῃ τὴν ἀποκάλυψιν, ἥν μοι ἐπηγγείλατο δεῖξαι διὰ τῆς πρεσβυτέρας ἐκείνης, αὐτῇ τῇ νυκτί μοι ὦπται ἡ πρεσβυτέρα καὶ εἶπέν μοι: Ἐπεὶ οὕτως ἐνδεὴς εἶ καὶ σπουδαῖος εἰς τὸ γνῶναι πάντα, ἐλθὲ εἰς…

I went up now according to a revelation and set before them the gospel that I proclaim among the Gentiles — apart privately however to those esteemed — lest perhaps in vain I may be running or have run.
καὶkai and G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
rarer in Galatians than elsewhere in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίand8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

I went up now according to a revelation and set before them the gospel that I proclaim among the Gentiles — apart privately however to those esteemed — lest perhaps in vain I may be running or have run.
ἀνεθέμηνanatithēmi set before G394 Verb · second aorist · middle · indicative · first person · singular
2× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Galatians than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To set forth or declare, as Paul did in Acts 25:14 and Galatians 2:2. This word means to communicate or share information with others. It is used to describe a clear presentation of ideas.
Tyndale gloss
to set before
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἀνατίθημι (*anatithemi*) is built from the prefix ἀνα- and the middle voice of τίθημι. It means to set forth, declare, or communicate something for consideration. In the New Testament, it appears in Acts 25:14 and Galatians 2:2, where it conveys the idea of presenting a case or report. The lexicons show some variation in emphasis on its meanings, particularly regarding the contexts in which it is used.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἀνα-τίθημι,

[in LXX chiefly for חרם (Cremer, 546);]

to lay upon, set up, etc. Mid. -εμαι, in late writers (Plut., al.; v. also MM, VGT, s.v.), to set forth, declare: Ac 25:14, Ga 2:2.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀνα-τίθημι : 2 aor. mid. ἀνεθέμην ; [in various senses fr. Hom. down]; in the mid. voice to set forth a thing drawn forth, as it were, from some corner (avd), to set forth [in words], declare, [R. V. lay before]: τινί τι, Acts xxv. 14; Gal. ii. 2, (2 Mace. iii. 9; [Μῖο. vii. 57; Artem. oneir. 2, 64 τινὶ τὸ ὄναρ; Diog. Laért. 2, 17, 16 p. 191 ed. Heubn.; Plut. amat. narr. p. 772d.) Cf. Fritzschiorum Opusce. p. 169; [Holsten, Zum Evang. des Paulus u. 4. Petrus p. 256 sq. Comp.: προσ-ανατίθημι.]

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀνατίθημι. Note the perfect active ἀνατέθηκα in Sy// 604! (Pergamon, end of iii/B.c.). This is a later example of what is now known to be the classical form of the perfect of τίθημι, which only in the Hellenistic age was replaced by τέθεικα. The late sense ‘‘impart,” “communicate,” with a view to consultation, found in the two NT occurrences of the word (Ac 2514, Gal 2?; cf. 2 Macc 3%) seems to appear in P Par 6975 (A.D. 233) ἀναθέμενοι τὸ πρᾶγμα ἀκ[έραιον]. In P Strass I. 417 (A.D. 250) ὥστε οὐκ ἂν ἔχοι ἀναθέσθαι τὴν “ Slkn[v εἰς ἑτέραν ἡμέραν] the verb = “postpone.” The active = “‘ dedicate’’ occurs everywhere. ἀνατολή. For the use of the plural to denote ‘‘the east,” found unambiguously in Mt 2? (cf. 811, 2427, Lk 1329), we can ’ , ανατρέπω quote the new parchment from Media, presumably the home of these Magi, P Said Khan 2%8 (p.c. 22), where we read ὅρια καὶ γειτνίαι ἀπὸ τῶν…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀνατίθημι (anatithēmi) — to set before.

ἀνατίθημι,

perfect ἀνατέθηκα[Refs], etc.:—lay upon, once in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἀ. ἄχθος lay on as a burden, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: in good sense, ἀ. κῦδός τινι[Refs 5th c.BC+]. b. middle, put on board ship, [Refs]

2. in Prose, refer, attribute, a thing to a person, μεγάλα οἱ χρήματα ἀ.[Refs 5th c.BC+]; οὐ γὰρ ἄν οἱ πυραμίδα ἀνέθεσαν ποιήσασθαι would not have attributed to her the erection of the pyramid,[Refs 5th c.BC+]; εἰμή, ὅταν.. εὖ πράξητε, ἐμοὶ ἀναθήσετε will give me the credit of it, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also, compare, τινὰ εἴς τι[Refs 4th c.BC+] lay them upon him, entrust them to him, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀνατίθημι

anatithemi

from 303 and the middle voice of 5087; to set forth (for oneself), i.e

propound:--communicate, declare.

see GREEK for 303

see GREEK for 5087

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀνατίθημι

v.

I lay a case before, impart, communicate, relate

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀνατίθημι anatithēmi 2x

in NT only mid., to submit to a person’s consideration, statement, or report of matters, Acts 25:14; Gal. 2:2*

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-2AMI-1S — Verb · second aorist · middle · indicative · first person · singular
second aorist middle indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-2AMI-1S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: second Aorist Voice: Middle Mood: Indicative Person: first Number: Singular

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

be-for': The translation of a great variety of Hebrew and Greek words. "Haran died before (the English Revised Version "in the presence of," literally "before the face of") his father Terah" (Ge 11:28). To be "before" God is to enjoy His favor (Ps 31:22). "The Syrians before" (Isa 9:12 the Revised Version, margin "on the east," as "behind," owing to the position of Canaan, relative to Syria, implies the west).

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
50%laid before
laid before50% · 1×set before50% · 1×

2 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
βασιλεύςa king, ruler, emper
Article the
καίand, even, also, nam
ἀποκάλυψιςan unveiling, un
ἀνατίθημιset before
what comes after →
Article the
κατά
αὐτός
Article the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀνατίθημι · 2× in the New Testament
Acts Galatians
Across the New Testament2 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria
Philo of AlexandriaOn Joseph 240c. AD 40

αὐτοκελεύστῳ καὶ ἑκουσίῳ γνώμῃ πρὸς συμβάσεις ἐθελοντὴς ἀφῖγμαι συμβούλοις χρησάμενος δυσί, τῇ τε πρὸς τὸν πατέρα εὐσεβείᾳ, ᾧ τὸ πλεῖστον τῆς χάριτος ἀνατίθημι, καὶ τῇ φυσικῇ φιλανθρωπίᾳ, ᾗ πρὸς ἅπαντας διαφερόντως δὲ πρὸς τοὺς ἀφ’ αἵματος χρῶμαι.

JosephusAgainst Apion 1.19c. AD 75–95

Αἰτίαι δὲ τῆς τοιαύτης διαφωνίας πολλαὶ μὲν ἴσως ἂν καὶ ἕτεραι τοῖς βουλομένοις ζητεῖν ἂν φανεῖεν, ἐγὼ δὲ δυσὶ ταῖς λεχθησομέναις τὴν μεγίστην ἰσχὺν ἀνατίθημι, καὶ προτέραν ἐρῶ τὴν κυριωτέραν εἶναί μοι δοκοῦσαν·

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 5th c. AD
P.Amh. 2 80ArsinoitesAD 232–AD 233

με πρὸς εὐκαιρίαν … τὴν προκιμένην κώμην … ανγον φθάνω δεδήλωται ἀλλ … βιβλία ἀνεθέμην ἐν τῷ σεβασμιωτάτῳ καὶ σεβαστῶ Ἁδρειανείῳ πεμφθησόμενα τῷ λαμπροτάτῳ ἡγεμόνι Μηουίῳ Ὁνωρατιανῷ ὑπὸ τῶν

P.Oxy. 17 2130OxyrhynchosAD 267

ὑμῖν ἐκκλήτου βιβλία ἐπὶ τὸν κράτιστον ἐπιστράτηγον Αἴλιον Φαῦστον δουκηνάριον, καὶ μὴ προσεθέντων τούτων ἀνεθέμην ἐν τῷ αὐτόθι Σεβαστείῳ πρὸς τοῖς θείοις ἴχνεσι τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν Αὐτοκράτορος Γαλλιηνοῦ Σεβαστοῦ

PSI 7 823AD 401–AD 500

εἰς ἡμᾶς … ε … … τηται ἐπιδείκνυται πλὴν δῷ μοι τὴν ἀσφάλειαν. διὸ ἀνεθέμην τὸν αὐτὸν γεωργὸν εἰς τὴν δημοσίαν φυλακήν. μαρτυρεῖ δὲ ὁ θεὸς διὰ τὸ σέβας

I went up now according to a revelation and set before them the gospel that I proclaim among the Gentiles — apart privately however to those esteemed — lest perhaps in vain I may be running or have run.
αὐτοῖςautos them G846 Personal pronoun · dative · plural · masculine
5,550× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
rarer in Galatians than elsewhere in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This pronoun refers to a person or thing, like 'he', 'she', or 'it'. It is used in the Bible to emphasize a person or thing, like in John 2:25 where it says 'he himself knew'.
Tyndale gloss
it/s/he
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

αὐτός is a pronoun meaning 'self' or 'the same,' used to emphasize distinction or opposition. It can function as a reflexive pronoun and appears frequently in the New Testament, often in contexts that highlight contrast or identity, such as in Luke 5:37 and John 2:25. The entries indicate that it can also be used in various grammatical constructions, including with articles to denote sameness.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

αὐτός, -ή, -ό,

determinative pron., in late Gk. much more freq. than in cl. (WM, 178 f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399).

Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., v. infr., iii);

self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Lk 5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jo 2:25; αὐ. ὑμεῖς, Jo 3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Ro 15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jo 2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ, Mk 2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mk 6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mt 3:4, Mk 6:17, Jo 16:27, I Th 3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

αὐτός, -7, -d, pron. (“derived from the particle αὖ with the added force of a demonstrative pronoun. In itself it signifies nothing more than again, applied to what has either been previously mentioned or, when the whole discourse is looked at, must necessarily be .upplied.” Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 219; [see Vaniéek p. 268]). It is used by the bibl. writ. both of the O. T. and of the N. T. far more frequently than the other pronouns; and in this very frequent and almost inordinate use of it, they deviate greatly from prof. auth.; cf. B. § 127, 9. [On classic usage ef. Hermann, Opusce. i. 308 sqq., of which dissertation a summary is given in his edition of Viger pp- 732-736.] I. self, as used (in all persons, genders, numbers) to distinguish a person or thing from or contrast it with another, or to give him (it) emphatic prominence. ik When used to express Opposition or Distinction, it is…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

αὐτός. The weakening of the old distinction between αὐτὸς 6 and ὁ αὐτός, especially in Luke, is noted in Proleg. p. 91, and paralleled from Hellenistic. We may add (cf. Linleitung p. 145f.) Sy// 8071 (ii/A.D.) αὐταῖς ταῖς ἡμέραις, where Dittenberger remarks ‘‘expectaveris ταῖς αὐταῖς," OG/S 383! (Antiochus of Commagene, i/8.c.) τὴν αὐτήν τε κρίσιν, for which Ditt. desiderates ταύτην τὴν κρίσιν, P Iib I. 30° (B.c. 265) αὐτὸς Ὧρος “the said H.,’’ P Lille I. 238 (B.C, 221) οὗ μ[ισ]θωτὴς Ἡρώδ[ης] ὁ αὐτός “ce méme L.,”’ P Oxy VI. 892% (A.D. 338) τῆς αὐτῆς πόλεως, 26. VIII. 1105 (A.D. 254) τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἀμφοδογραμματέως “the said a.’’: all these seem to be practically identical, with αὐτός differing little from ἐκεῖνος. The combination αὐτὸ τοῦτο may be illustrated by P Grenf I. 114 (literary, ii/B.c.) “ for this reason ” (Ed.) as in 2 Pet 1°, P Ryl 11. 77°9 (a.p. 192) καὶ αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἀσφαλίσομαι…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

αὐτός (autos) — it/s/he.

αὐτός

(Cretan dialect ἀϝτός [Refs] (also αὐτόν[Refs], reflexive pronoun, self:—in oblique cases used for the personal pronoun, him, her, it:—with Article, ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (also ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

I. self, myself, thyself, etc., accusative to the person of the Verb: frequently joined with ἐγώ, σύ, etc. (see. below 10),

I.1. one's true self, the soul, not the body, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; reversely, body, not soul, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; oneself, as opposed to others who are less prominent, as king to subject, [Refs]; man to wife and children, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; warrior to horses, [Refs 8th c.BC+], or to weapons, [Refs]; shepherd to herd, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; seamen to ships, [Refs]: generally, whole to parts,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, the Master, as in the [Refs 4th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

αὐτός

autos

from the particle au (perhaps akin to the base of 109 through the idea

of a baffling wind) (backward); the reflexive pronoun self, used

(alone or in the comparative 1438) of the third person , and (with the

proper personal pronoun) of the other persons:--her, it(-self), one,

the other, (mine) own, said, (self-), the) same, ((him-, my-, thy-

)self, (your-)selves, she, that, their(-s), them(-selves), there(-at,

- by, -in, -into, -of, -on, -with), they, (these) things, this (man),

those, together, very, which. Compare 848.

see GREEK for 109

see GREEK for 1438

see GREEK for 848

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

αὐτός, αὐτή, αὐτό

Pers.pr.

he, she, it, they, them, same

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

αὐτός autos 5x

self, very; alone, Mk. 6:31; 2 Cor. 12:13; of one’s self, of one’s own motion, Jn. 16:27; used also in the oblique cases independently as a personal pron. of the third person; ὁ αὐτός, the same; unchangeable, Heb. 1:12; κατὰ τὸ αὐτό, at the same time, together, Acts 14:1; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό, in one and the same place, Mt. 22:34; at the same time, together, Acts 3:1

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

αὐτός self, Lat. ipse:— in the oblique cases simply for the personal Pron., him, her, it:— with the Artic. ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (or ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

self, myself, thyself, etc., acc. to the person of the Verb., Hom., etc.:

oneself, one's true self, the soul, not the body, Od.; or opp. to others, as king to subjects, parent to children, man to wife, etc., Hom.; hence absol. for the master, τίς οὗτος;—Αὐτός, i. e. Socrates, Ar.; similarly in neut. αὐτὸ δείξει the result will shew, Eur.

of oneself, of one's own accord, Lat. sponte, Hom., Soph.

by oneself, alone, αὐτός περ ἐών although alone, Il.; αὐτοί ἐσμεν we are by ourselves, i. e. among friends, Ar.

in Plat., τὸ δίκαιον αὐτό right in itself, the idea of right, etc.; cf. αὐτοάνθρωπος.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Pron-DPM — Personal pronoun · dative · plural · masculine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-DPM Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Case: Dative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
52%him
him52% · 3025×them25% · 1488×it6% · 323×her4% · 250×other renderings10% · 587×other renderings3% · 188×

5,861 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 92 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object33%adverbial28%indirect object19%subject18%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5,561 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
λέγωI say, speak
καίand, even, also,δέbut, on the otheἸησοῦςJesus
πρός
λέγωI say, speakἔρχομαιI come, goδέbut, on the othe
ἐν
Article theαὐτόςεὑρίσκωI find
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakοὗτοςὁράωI see, look upon
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςσύθεόςGod, a god
αὐτόςthem5550×
what comes after →
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesusμαθητήςa learner, disciθεόςGod, a god
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theλέγωI say, speakαὐτός
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςτίςIrgκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
ἐν
Article theαὐτόςὅς
εἰς
Article theδικαιοσύνηjustice, justnesἹεροσόλυμαJerusalem

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceαὐτός · 5,550× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew John Mark Acts Revelation Romans Hebrews 1 John 1 Corinthians Ephesians 2 Corinthians

19 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

περὶ τοῦ γένους Ἀδάμου καὶ τῶν ἀπ' αὐτοῦ δέκα γενεῶν τῶν μέχρι τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.4c. AD 100

πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

Πακοίβιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ Παθῦρειν πεδίωι σφραγίδων τεσσάρων , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

ὡς ἐτῶν νε μέσος ἢ ἐλάσσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, καὶ Πετεαρσοῆρις Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος

I went up now according to a revelation and set before them the gospel that I proclaim among the Gentiles — apart privately however to those esteemed — lest perhaps in vain I may be running or have run.
τὸho the G3588 Article · accusative · singular · neuter
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Galatians as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-ASN — Article · accusative · singular · neuter
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-ASN Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

I went up now according to a revelation and set before them the gospel that I proclaim among the Gentiles — apart privately however to those esteemed — lest perhaps in vain I may be running or have run.
εὐαγγέλιονeuangelion gospel G2098 Noun · accusative · singular · neuter
76× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Galatians than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The gospel, or good news, refers to the message of salvation through Christ, as in Mark 1:15 and Romans 1:16. This word describes the core of Christian teaching. It is the good news of God's love and redemption.
Amplified meaning
good news, message of salvation
Tyndale gloss
gospel
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word εὐαγγέλιον (i.e., *euangelion*) means 'good news' or 'gospel.' It is derived from the concept of a reward for bringing good tidings. In the New Testament, it specifically refers to the message of salvation through Jesus Christ and the kingdom of God. The term is used in various contexts, often accompanied by phrases indicating its subject, such as the gospel of Christ or the gospel of the kingdom.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

εὐαγγέλιον, -ου, τό

[in LXX for בְּשׂוֹרָה, בְּשׂרָה, II Ki 4:10 18:22 18:25 * ;]

in cl.,

בְּשׂוֹרָה, a reward for good tidings (Hom.; pl., LXX, II Ki 4:10);

in pl., εὐ. θύειν, to make a thank-offering for good tidings (Xen., al.).

Later (Luc., Plut., al.), good tidings, good news; in NT of the good tidings of the kingdom of God and of salvation through Christ, the gospel: Mk 1:15, Ac 15:7, Ro 1:16, Ga 2:2, I Th 2:4, al.; c. gen. obj., τ. βασιλείας, Mt 4:23; τ. Χριστοῦ, Ro…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

εὐαγγέλιον, -ov, τό, (εὐάγγελος [cf. εὐαγγελίζω), Hebr. mwa and ΤΠ3 ; 1. a reward for good tidings (cf. ra διδασκάλια, the fees given the διδάσκαλος), Hom. Od. 14, 152; Οἷς. ad Att. 2,3 and 12; 13,40; Plut. Demetr. 17; Ages. 33; Sept. 2S. iv. 10. 2. good tidings: Leian. asin. 26; App. Ὁ. civ. 4,20; Plut.; al.; plur. Sept. 2S. xviii. 22, 25, com. txt.; but in each place εὐαγγελία should apparently be restored, on account of vs. 20 ἀνὴρ εὐαγγελίας. Inthe N.T.spec. a. the glad tidings of the kingdom of God soon to be set up, and subsequently also of Jesus, the Messiah, the founder of this kingdom: ME. i. 155 viii. 35; x. 29; xiii. 10; xiv.9; xvi.15; Mt. xxvi. 13; w. agen. of the obj. added: τῆς βασιλείας, Mt. iv. 23; ix. 85; xxiv. 14; Mk.i.14 ΒΤ, τ. After the death of Christ the term τὸ εὐαγγέλιον comprises also the preaching of (concerning) Jesus Christ as having suffered death on the…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

εὐαγγέλιον. For the very rare use of this word in the singular outside the NT and early Christian literature, see the iii/A.D. pap. letter cited s.v. γνώστης ad iit., and cf. Archiv v. p. 406f. The plur. is found = ‘‘ good tidings” in the striking calendar inscr. from Priene of date about B.C. 9 with reference to the birthday of the Emperor Augustus—jptev δὲ τῶι κόσpo τῶν δι᾿ αὐτὸν εὐανγελίζων ἡ γενέθλιος, ‘* but the birthday of the god was for the world the beginning of tidings of joy on his account” (OG/S 458%, Deissmann LAZ, p. 370f.) For the more ordinary usage = ‘‘sacrifices,” “thank-offerings,’’ cf. OG/ZS 4%* (iv/B.c.) εὐαγγέλια Kal σωτήρια ἔ[θ]υσε, Michel 13257 εὐαγγέλια θύσω, and the new literary instance in Menandrea p. 90*'*. On the history of the word and its cognates, see Harnack Constitution and Law, p. 278f., and Milligan Zhess. p. 141 ff. MGr Bayγέλιο, ‘ gospel.”…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

εὐαγγέλιον (euangelion) — gospel.

εὐαγγέλ-ιον, τό,

reward of good tidings, given to the messenger, εὐαγγέλιον δέ μοι ἔστω [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἀπολήψῃ τὸ εὐ. [Refs 1st c.AD+] to make a thank-offering for good-tidings, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐβουθύτει ὡς εὐ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; εὐ. στεφανοῦν, ἀναδῆσαί τινα, to crown one for good news brought, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II. good tidings, good news, in plural, [LXX+1st c.BC+]

II.2. in Christian sense, the gospel, [NT]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

εὐαγγέλιον

euaggelion

from the same as 2097; a good message, i.e. the gospel:--gospel.

see GREEK for 2097

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

εὐαγγέλιον, ου, τό

n.n.

the good news, the gospel

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

εὐαγγέλιον euangelion 76x

glad tidings, good or joyful news, Mt. 4:23; 9:35; the Gospel; doctrines of the Gospel, Mt. 26:13; Mk. 8:35; meton. the preaching of, or instruction in, the Gospel, 1 Cor. 4:15; 9:14

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

εὐαγγέλιον εὐαγγέλιον, ου, τό, from εὐάγγελος the reward of good tidings, given to the messenger, Od.; in pl., εὐαγγέλια θύειν to make a thankoffering for good tidings, Xen., etc.; εὐαγγελίων θυσίαι Aeschin.; εὐαγγέλια στεφανοῦν τινα to crown one for good news, Ar.

in Christian sense, the Glad Tidings, i. e. the Gospel (Saxon gode-spell), NTest.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-ASN — Noun · accusative · singular · neuter
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

gos'-pel (to euaggelion): The word gospel is derived from the Anglo-Saxon word which meant "the story concerning God." In the New Testament the Greek word euaggelion, means "good news." It proclaims tidings of deliverance. The word sometimes stands for the record of the life of our Lord (Mr 1:1), embracing all His teachings, as in Ac 20:24. But the word "gospel" now has a peculiar use, and describes primarily the message which Christianity announces. "Good news" is its significance. It means a gift from God. It is the proclamation of the forgiveness of sins and sonship with God restored through Christ. It means remission of sins and reconciliation with God. The gospel is not only a message of salvation, but also the instrument through which the Holy Spirit works (

Signifies good news, and is that revelation and dispensation which God has made known to guilty man through Jesus Christ our Savior and Redeemer. Scripture speaks of "the gospel of the kingdom," Mt 24:14, the gospel "of the grace of God," Ac 20:24, "of Christ," and "of peace," Ro 1:16 10:15. It is the "glorious" and the "everlasting" gospel, 1Ti 1:11 Re 14:6, and well merits the noblest epithets that can be given it. The declaration of this gospel was made through the life and teaching, the death, resurrection, and ascension of our Lord.

Nave's Topical Bible

→ Called

GOSPEL OF THE KINGDOM Mt 4:23; 24:14

GOSPEL OF GOD Ro 1:1; 15:16; 1Th 2:8; 1Ti 1:11; 1Pe 4:17

GOSPEL OF JESUS CHRIST Mr 1:1

GOSPEL OF CHRIST Ro 1:16; 1Co 9:12,18; Ga 1:7; Php 1:27; 1Th 3:2

THE DISPENSATION OF THE GRACE OF GOD Eph 3:2

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
95%gospel
gospel95% · 71×glad tidings3% · 2×other renderings3% · 2×

75 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial46%object40%subject12%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 76 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
κηρύσσωI proclaim, heraἐνδιά
θεόςGod, a god
Article the
εἰς
ἀφορίζωI rail off, sepa
Disj
λαμβάνωI receive, take
ἕτεροςanother, different
εἰς
εὐαγγέλιονgospel76×
what comes after →
Article the
Χριστόςanointed, the MeθεόςGod, a godβασιλείαkingship, sovere
ἐγώ
διάκαίand, even, also,σύ
ὅς
εὐαγγελίζωI bring good newκηρύσσωI proclaim, heraἀκούωI hear, listen
εἰς
ὅλοςall, the whole, Article the
οὗτος
ἐν

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceεὐαγγέλιον · 76× in the New Testament
Philippians Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Mark Galatians 1 Thessalonians Ephesians Matthew 2 Timothy 2 Thessalonians Acts
Across the New Testament17 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Ignatius of Antioch The Didache Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas Josephus
JosephusThe Jewish War 2.420c. AD 75–95

Φλώρῳ μὲν οὖν δεινὸν εὐαγγέλιον ἦν, καὶ προῃρημένος ἐξάπτειν τὸν πόλεμον οὐδὲν ἀπεκρίνατο τοῖς πρεσβευταῖς·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 5.9c. AD 100

ὅτε δὲ τοὺς ἰδίους ἀποστόλους τοὺς μέλλοντας κηρύσσειν τὸ εὐαγγέλιον αὐτοῦ ἐξελέξατο, ὄντας ὑπὲρ πᾶσαν ἁμαρτίαν ἀνομωτέρους, ἵνα δείξῃ, ὅτι οὐκ ἦλθεν καλέσαι δικαίους, ἀλλὰ ἁμαρτωλούς, τότε ἐφανέρωσεν ἑαυτὸν εἶναι υἱὸν θεοῦ.

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 47.2c. AD 96

τί πρῶτον ὑμῖν ἐν ἀρχῇ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου ἔγραψεν ;

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 3rd c. AD
P.Oxy. 38 2853 RoThinites oder HerakleopolitesAD 245–AD 246

Ἰουλίωι Ἀμμωνίωι τῶι καὶ Εὐαγγελίῳ στρα … παρὰ Αὐρηλίων Ἀρείου Τριαδέλφου καὶ Ἀμμωνίου Διονυσίου ἐπιμελητῶν διώρυγος Χιλιαρουρῶν. σήμερον ἥτις

PSI 9 1041OxyrhynchitesAD 226–AD 300

Φιλάδελφον καὶ Πεκῦσιν καὶ Νααρωοῦν κατηχουμένους τῶν συναγομένων καὶ Λέωνα κατηχούμενον ἐν ἀρχῇ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου πρόσδεξαι ὡς καθήκει· διʼ ὧν σὲ καὶ τοὺς σὺν σοὶ ἐγὼ καὶ οἱ σὺν

P. Princ. 3 180Hermopolites (?)AD 501–AD 600

βαστακτὴ φοινίκων … … ὅμοια πεντήκοντα καὶ βιβλίον … … ἀπόστολον καὶ τὸ ἅγιον εὐαγγέλιον … … ζῷα βοικὰ δύο συντιμηθέντα

I went up now according to a revelation and set before them the gospel that I proclaim among the Gentiles — apart privately however to those esteemed — lest perhaps in vain I may be running or have run.
hos, hē that G3739 Relative pronoun · accusative · singular · neuter
1,407× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Galatians as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The word which is a pronoun used to ask for or identify something, as seen in John 5:11. It can also be used to describe a person or thing, such as in Mark 15:23. This word helps to clarify or specify what is being talked about.
Tyndale gloss
which
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

ὅς is a pronoun meaning 'who,' 'which,' 'what,' or 'that.' It serves as both a demonstrative and a relative pronoun, agreeing in gender with its antecedent. The New Testament uses it in various constructions, including phrases like ὃς μὲν... ὃς δέ to indicate contrasting subjects. Notably, it can express purpose or cause in certain contexts.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ,

the postpositive article (ἄρθρον ὑποτακτικόν).

As demonstr. pron. = οὗτος, ὅδε, this, that, also for αὐτός, chiefly in nom.: ὅς δέ, but he (cf. ἦ δὲ ὅς, freq. in Plat.), Mk 15:23, Jo 5:11; ὃς μὲν . . . ὃς δέ, the one . . . the other, Mt 21:35 22:5 25:15, Lk 23:33, Ac 27:14, Ro 14:5, I Co 11:21, II Co 2:16, Ju 22; neut., ὃ μὲν . . . ὃ δέ, the one . . . the other, some . . . some, Mt 13:8, 23, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὅς 455 ὅς iii. 5 [RG], 6; Heb. vi. 10; ix. 20; Jas. ii. 5; 1 In. iii. 24; Jude 15; for other exx. see below; ἐν ὥρᾳ 7 οὐ γινώoxet, Mt. xxiv. 50; τῇ παραδύσει 9 παρεδώκατε, Mk. vii. 13 ; add, Lk. ii. 20; v. 9; ix. 435 xii. 46; xxiv. 25; Jn. xvii. 5; Acts ii. 22; xvii. 31; xx. 38; 2 Co. xii. 21; 2Th.i. 4; Rev. xviii. 6; ef. W. § 24,1; [B. as above]. Rarely attraction oceurs where the verb governs the dative [but see below]: thus, κατέναντι οὗ ἐπίστευσε θεοῦ for xarévavre θεοῦ, ᾧ ἐπίστευσε (See κατέναντι). Ro. iv. 17; φωνῆς, ἧς ἔκραξα (for 7 (al. ἥν, οἴ. W. 164 (154 sq.) Β. 287 (217)}7), Acts xxiv. 21, οἵ. Is. vi. 4; (7γετο δὲ καὶ τῶν ἑαυτοῦ τε πιστῶν, οἷς ἥδετο καὶ ὧν ἠπίστει πολλούς, for καὶ πολλοὺς τούτων, οἷς ἠπίστει, Xen. Cyr. ὅ, 4, 39; ὧν ἐγὼ ἐντετύχηκα οὐδείς; for οὐδεὶς τούτων, οἷς ἐντετ. Plato, Gorg. p. 509 ἃ.; Protag. p. 361 6.; derep.7 p.531e.; παρ᾽ ὧν βοηθεῖς, οὐδεμίαν λήψει…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ος is found as a demonstrative pronoun in P Ryl II. 14415 (complaint of assault—a.D. 38) ὃς δὲ ἐκ τοῦ ἐναντίου ἄλογον ἀηδίαν μοι ἐπιχειρήσας παρεχρήσατό μοι πολλὰ καὶ ἄσχημα, ‘“whereupon he opposing me made a brutal and odious attack upon me and subjected me to much shameful mishandling” (Edd.): cf. Mk 15%, Jn 51. For ὃς μέν... ὃς δέ, “the one . . the other,” as in Mt 21° a/., see P Oxy IX. 1189? (c. A.D. 117) ἐπιστολὰς δύο ds ἔγραψα ἣν μὲν σοὶ ἣν δὲ Σαβείνῳ, and for ὃς δέ solétarium see PSI. IV. 313° (iii/iv A.D.) with the editor’s note. Ὃς ἄν (ἐάν) c. conj. = ‘‘ whosoever ” may be illustrated Ly P Par 4622 (B.c. 153) (= Witkowski*, p. 87), περὶ dv ἂν βούληι γράφε, P Grenf I. 30% (B.c. 103) ἐφ} οἷς ἂν οὖν ὑμῶν προσδέωνται, P Oxy IV. 743%% (B.C. 2) ἐν ols ἐὰν σοῦ προσδέηται, °° ὑπὲρ ὧν ἐὰν θέλῃς. For the comparative usage of ὃς ἄν and ὃς ἐάν, see Thackeray Gr. i. p. 68, cited s.v. ἄν.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὅς (hos, hē) — which.

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ,

genitive οὗ, ἧς, οὗ, etc.; dative plural οἷς, αἷς, οἷς, etc.: Epic dialect forms, genitive ὅου (probably replacing Οο) in the phrases ὅου κλέος οὔ ποτ᾽ ὀλεῖται [Refs 8th c.BC+]; feminine ἕης [Refs 8th c.BC+]; elsewhere only ἧς [Refs]; dative plural οἷς, οἷσι, ᾗς, ᾗσι (never αἷς or αἷσι in [Refs 8th c.BC+] — _pronoun_ used,

__A as demonstrative by the side of οὗτος, ὅδε, and the Article ὁ, ἡ, τό: in post-Homeric Gr. this use survived only in a few special phrases.

__B as a Relat. by the side of the Article ὅ, ἥ, τό (see. ὁ, ἡ, τό, c):—this demonstrative and Relat. pronoun must not be confounded with the Possess. ὅς, ἥ, ὅν. (With Gr. Relat. ὅς, ἥ, ὅ cf. Sanskrit Relat. yas, yā, yad, Lithuanian jis, ji (he, she), Oslav. i, ja, je (he, she…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὅς ἥ ὅ

hos

he hay, and neuter

ho ho

probably a primary word (or perhaps a form of the article 3588); the

relatively (sometimes demonstrative) pronoun, who, which, what,

that:--one, (an-, the) other, some, that, what, which, who(-m, -se),

etc. See also 3757.

see GREEK for 3588

see GREEK for 3757

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ

Rel.pr.

who, which, what, that

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὅς hos 1x

who, which, what, that, Mt. 1:16, 23, 25; in NT interrog. ἐφ’ ὅ, wherefore, why, Mt. 26:50; in NT ὅς μὲν ... ὅς δέ, for ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, Mt. 21:35; 2 Cor. 2:16

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Rel-ASN — Relative pronoun · accusative · singular · neuter
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

R-ASN Part of Speech: Relative pronoun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
25%which
which25% · 356×whom20% · 291×who17% · 238×that14% · 199×what8% · 117×whatever2% · 30×whose2% · 29×other renderings10% · 145×other renderings2% · 25×

1,430 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 60 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object40%subject29%adverbial26%indirect object3%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,407 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ἐν
ἡμέραa dayαὐτόςἵναin order that, s
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςἔχωI have, hold, poυἱόςa son, descenden
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakἀπόλλυμιI destroy, lose,δοῦλος (II)
διά
ἐκεῖνοςΧριστόςanointed, the Meαὐτός
εἰς
καίand, even, also,ἐγώοἰκίαa house, househo
ὅςthat1407×
what comes after →
εἰμίI am, exist
Article theμεθερμηνεύωI translate, intκαίand, even, also,
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existἔξεστι(ν)it is permitted,γινώσκωI come to know,
Article the
θεόςGod, a godυἱόςa son, descendenκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
καίand, even, also, nam
σύποιέωI do, makeαὐτός
δέbut, on the other ha
ἄνDisjἑξήκονταIndecτριάκονταIndec

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὅς · 1,407× in the New Testament
Acts Luke John Matthew Romans Mark Hebrews Revelation 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Colossians Ephesians

22 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 33c. AD 40

ἵν’ οὖν μὴ αἰεὶ συμφερόμεναι στασιάζωσι καὶ πόλεμος ἀντ’ εἰρήνης ἐπικρατῇ τὴν ἀκοσμίαν ἐν κόσμῳ τιθείς, οὐ μόνον ἐχώρισε φῶς καὶ σκότος, ἀλλὰ καὶ ὅρους ἐν μέσοις ἔθετο διαστήμασιν, οἷς ἀνεῖρξε τῶν ἄκρων ἑκάτερον·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

πῶς τὸ Σοδομιτῶν ἔθνος θεὸς κατεστρέψατο χολωθεὶς αὐτοῖς ἐφ' οἷς ἡμάρτανον.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 4.8c. AD 100

Μωϋσῆ Μωϋσῆ, κατάβηθι τὸ τάχος, ὅτι ἠνόμησεν ὁ λαός σου, οὓς ἐξήγαγες ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου, καὶ συνῆκεν Μωϋσῆς καὶ ἔριψεν τὰς δύο πλάκας ἐκ τῶν χειρῶν αὐτοῦ: καὶ συνετρίβη αὐτῶν ἡ διαθήκη, ἵνα ἡ τοῦ ἠγαπημένου Ἰησοῦ ἐγκατασφραγισθῇ εἰς τὴν καρδίαν ἡμῶν…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 2nd c. BC
P.Grenf. 1 32Pelusion103 BC

θεοῖς. καλῶς ποιήσεις διαλύσας Ἁρκοννῆσιν καὶ Ψενανοῦπιν καὶ … … ελθεῖν ἐπὶ προ … ους καὶ γραψάτωσαν ἡμῖν ὑπὲρ ὧν ἐσπούδασας διὰ τὰς ἡμῶν παρακλήσεις καὶ ση

P.Adl. 15Pathyris (?)101 BC

ἐδάνεισεν Ὧρος Ὥρου Ὥρωι Νεχούτου ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος μελίχρως ὑποκλαστὸς ἀναφάλακρος μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν οὖς ἀριστερὸν τετρημένον πυροῦ ἀρτάβας τεσσαράκοντα ἓξ κριθῆς ἑξήκοντα ἐννέα , ἴσους ἀτόκους, ὧν ἀπόδοσιν

P.Adl. 17Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)100 BC

τῆς ἐπιγονῆς τῶν ἐκ Παθύρεως ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος μελίχρως τετανὸς ἀναφάλακρος μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν οὖς ἀριστερὸν τετρημένον χαλκοῦ ταλάντων πέντε . προπωλητὴς καὶ βεβαιωτὴς τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην

I went up now according to a revelation and set before them the gospel that I proclaim among the Gentiles — apart privately however to those esteemed — lest perhaps in vain I may be running or have run.
κηρύσσωkērussō I proclaim G2784 Verb · present · active · indicative · first person · singular
61× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Galatians than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To preach means to proclaim or herald a message, especially the gospel. It is used in Mark 1:45 and Luke 4:18-19 to describe Jesus' ministry of proclaiming God's truth. This preaching is a public declaration of God's message.
Amplified meaning
proclaim, herald
Tyndale gloss
to preach
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

κηρύσσω is a verb meaning to proclaim or herald, particularly in the context of announcing divine truth or the Gospel. It is used in the New Testament to describe the act of preaching, often associated with figures like John the Baptist and the apostles. The word is derived from a tradition of formal public announcements and carries a sense of authority. Notably, Abbott-Smith mentions its use in Mark 1:45 and other verses, emphasizing its role in the proclamation of the Gospel.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

κηρύσσω,

[in LXX chiefly for קרא;]

to be a herald, to proclaim: Mk 1:45 7:36, Lk 4:18, 19(LXX) (but v. Field, Notes, 174) 8:39, Ro 2:21, I Co 9:27, Ga 5:11, al.; in NT, chiefly of the proclamation of the Gospel, to proclaim, preach: τὸ εὐαγέλιον, Mt 4:23 9:35 24:14 26:13, Mk 1:14 13:10 14:9 16:[15], Ga 2:2, Col 1:23, I Th 2:9; seq. εἰς, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

κηρύσσω; impf. ἐκήρυσσον: fut. κηρύξω: 1 aor. ἐκήρυξα. [inf. κηρύξαι RG Tr WH, κηρῦξαι LT; ef. Lipsius, Gramm. Untersuch. p. 32 sqq.; ΤᾺ Proleg. p. 101; W. § 6, 1 f. (see reff. s. v. ejpvé)]; Pass., pres. κηρύσσομαι:; 1 aor. éxnpvxOnv; 1 fut. κηρυχθήσομαι; (κήρυξ, q. v-); fr. Hom. down; Sept. for NYP i to be a herald ; to officiate as herald ; to proclaim after the manner of a herald; always with a suggestion of formality, gravity, and an authority which must be listened to and obeyed; a. univ. to publish, proclaim openly: something which has been done, Mk. vii. 36; τὸν λόγον, Mk. i. 45 (here joined with διαφημίζειν) ; foll. by indir. dise., Mk. v. 20; Lk. viii. 39; something which ought to be done, foll. by the inf. (cf. W. 322 (302); [B. § 141, 2]), Ro. ii. 21; Μωῦσῆν, the authority and precepts of Moses, Acts xv. 21; περιτομήν, the necessity of circumcision, Gal. v. 11. b. spec. used…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

κηρύσσω. In BGU IV. 1024, a curious papyrus codex of the end ο. iv/A.D. made up of various widely differing documents, we find in the account of a legal process 1:8 καιρύτδετε δὲ ἡ γυναικί, which apparently stands for κηρύττετε or κήρυττε δὲ τῇ γυναικί. On the form κηρύττω see Thumb Hellen, p- 79, and on the use of the verb in 1 Cor 9?? see Field Notes, p. 174, where any allusion to the office of the κῆρυξ in the public games is set aside in favour of a direct reference to the preaching of the Gospel. A new compound évexnpvéapev in the sense of ‘‘ we applied for tenders” is found in P Petr III. 41 verso? (Ptol.).

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

κηρύσσω (kērussō) — to preach.

κηρύσσω,

Attic dialect κηρύττω, Doric dialect κᾱρύσσω: imperfect ἐκήρυσσον [Refs 8th c.BC+]: future -ύξω [Refs 5th c.BC+], Doric dialect καρυξῶ [Refs]: aorist ἐκήρυξα [Refs 5th c.BC+], etc., Aeolic dialect participle καρύξαισα [Refs 5th c.BC+]perfect κεκήρῡχα (ἐπι-) [Refs 4th c.BC+]:—passive, future κηρυχθήσομαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist ἐκηρύχθην [Refs 5th c.BC+]: perfect κεκήρυγμαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—to be a herald, officiate as herald, κηρύσσων γήρασκε [Refs 8th c.BC+]

__b to be an auctioneer, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

2. make proclamation as a herald, λαὸν κηρύσσοντες ἀγειρόντων let them convene the people by voice of herald, [Refs 8th c.BC+] proclamation was made.., [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

κηρύσσω

kerusso

of uncertain affinity; to herald (as a public crier), especially

divine truth (the gospel):--preacher(-er), proclaim, publish.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

κηρύσσω

v.

I proclaim, herald, preach

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

κηρύσσω kēryssō 61x

to publish, proclaim, as a herald, 1 Cor. 9:27; to announce openly and publicly, Mk. 1:4; Lk. 4:18; to noise abroad, Mk. 1:45; 7:36; to announce as a matter of doctrine, inculcate, preach, Mt. 24:14; Mk. 1:38; 13:10; Acts 15:21; Rom. 2:21

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

κηρύσσω to be a herald, officiate as herald, Il.; λαὸν κηρύσσοντες ἀγειρόντων let them convene the people by voice of herald, id. Il.; κήρυσσε, κῆρυξ Aesch., etc.:—impers., κηρύσσει (sc. ὁ κῆρυξ) he gives notice, proclamation is made, Xen.

c. acc. pers. to summon by voice of herald, Hom., Ar.

to proclaim as conqueror, Xen., etc.: to extol, Eur.

to call upon, invoke, Aesch., Eur.

c. acc. rei, to proclaim, announce, τί τινι Trag.:— to proclaim or advertise for sale, Hdt.; κ. ἀποικίαν to proclaim a colony, i. e. to invite people to join as colonists, Thuc.

to proclaim or command publicly, Lat. indicere, Aesch., Soph., etc.; τὰ κηρυχθέντα the public orders, Soph.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PAI-1S — Verb · present · active · indicative · first person · singular
present active indicative — an action in progress.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PAI-1S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: first Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
21%proclaiming
proclaiming21% · 13×proclaim15% · 9×preaching8% · 5×preach5% · 3×do proclaim5% · 3×proclaimed3% · 2×proclaims3% · 2×having been proclaimed3% · 2×other renderings36% · 22×

61 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 29 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb98%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 61 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςδιδάσκωI teach
δέbut, on the other ha
πορεύομαιI travel, journeπῶςἐγώ
ἐγώ
ἀποστέλλωI send forth, seπαραγγέλλωI notify, commanδιά
ὅς
βάπτισμαthe rite or cereπίστιςfaith, belief, tεὐαγγέλιονthe good news, t
Article the
πόλιςa cityδιδάσκωI teachἀκούωI hear, listen
κηρύσσωI proclaim61×
what comes after →
Article the
εὐαγγέλιονthe good news, tβασιλείαkingship, sovereἸησοῦςJesus
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ἔθνοςa race, people,
εἰς
Article theοὗτοςσύ
καίand, even, also, nam
λέγωI say, speakεὐαγγελίζωI bring good newοὕτωthus, so, in thi
ἐπί
Article the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκηρύσσω · 61× in the New Testament
Mark Luke Matthew Acts 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Romans Galatians 1 Peter 1 Thessalonians 1 Timothy 2 Timothy
Across the New Testament15 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 25 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome The Shepherd of Hermas Philo of Alexandria
Philo of AlexandriaOn Husbandry 112c. AD 40

καὶ μὴ ἐπιτρέψῃς μηδὲ κήρυκι κηρῦξαι μηδὲ βραβευτῇ στεφανῶσαι τὸν ἐχθρόν, ἀλλ’ αὐτὸς παρελθὼν τὰ βραβεῖα καὶ τὸν φοίνικα ἀνάδος καὶ στεφάνωσον, εἰ θέλει, καὶ ταῖς ταινίαις ἀνάδησον καὶ κήρυξον αὐτὸς μεγάλῃ καὶ ἀρρήκτῳ φωνῇ κήρυγμα τοιοῦτον·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 4.274c. AD 75–95

Ἐὰν δέ τις ἢ χρυσίον ἢ ἀργύριον εὕρῃ καθʼ ὁδόν, ἐπιζητήσας τὸν ἀπολωλεκότα καὶ κηρύξας τὸν τόπον ἐν ᾧ εὗρεν ἀποδότω, τὴν ἐκ τῆς ἑτέρου ζημίας ὠφέλειαν οὐκ ἀγαθὴν ὑπολαμβάνων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 5.8c. AD 100

πέρας γέ τοι διδάσκων τὸν Ἰσραὴλ καὶ τηλικαῦτα τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα ποιῶν ἐκήρυσσεν, καὶ ὑπερηγάπησεν αὐτόν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 6th c. AD 1st c. AD

ἐκ τῶν προτεθέντων πρὸς δικαιοδοσίαν ὀνομάτων καὶ μὴ ὑπακουσάντων Μέττιος Ῥοῦφος ἐκέλευσε τὸν κήρυκα κηρῦξαι· οἱ προτεθέντες ἐπʼ ἐμὲ καὶ μὴ ὑπακούσαντες ἴστωσαν, ὅτι πάλιν ἀναγορευθήσονται καὶ ἂν μηδὲ

BGU 1 288ArsinoitesAD 144–AD 147

δικάζεσθαι, ἀλλὰ ἄμεινον ἡγησάμεθα … παραγείνηται καὶ τὸ ἕτερον ἀνα … … τὸν κριτὴν κηρύξας τὸν ἀναχωρήσαντα … … ρ … … μήτε ἐκδίκου ἔχοι τῇ ἰδίᾳ

P.Mich. 9 534Karanis (ArsinoitesAD 156

τὴν ὑπογραφήν. ἐνέτυχον πρὸ βήματος διὰ Ἀμμωνίου ῥήτορος τῇ κθ τοῦ αὐτοῦ μηνὸς καὶ ἐκηρύχθη ὁ ἀντίδικός μου πρὸ βήματος τρὶς καὶ οὐχ ὑπήκουσεν καὶ ὑπεμνημάτισαν.

I went up now according to a revelation and set before them the gospel that I proclaim among the Gentiles — apart privately however to those esteemed — lest perhaps in vain I may be running or have run.
ἐνen among G1722 Preposition
2,743× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Galatians as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word is a preposition that means in, on, or among something. It's used in many places, like Matthew 7:3 and Luke 7:37, to describe a location or relationship. It can also mean by, with, or during.
Tyndale gloss
in/on/among
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The most frequent preposition in the New Testament, 2,752 occurrences. In, on, at, among, within — its force comes almost entirely from the word it is attached to. What it does here is put the events inside a community rather than at a distance: they were fulfilled among us.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐν,

prep, (the most freq. of all in NT), c. dat. (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, c. abl.).

Of place, c. dat. rei, pers., in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Lk 7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mt 7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mt 12:40; τ. ὄρει, II Pe 1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Re 3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Ro 8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν , Lk 1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Ga 3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mt 12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103)…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐν Χριστῷ, ἐν Χριστῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ, ἐν κυρίῳ, (οἴ. Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. vol. ii. p. 82 544.; W. 389 (364); Weiss, Bibl. Theol. des N. T. §§ 84 b., 149 c.), ingrafied as it were in Christ, in fellowship and union with Christ, with the Lord: Ro. iii. 24; vi. 11, 23; viii. 39; 1Co.i.4; 2 Co. iii. 14; Gal. ii. 4; iii. 14, 26, 28; v. 6; Eph.i. 3 [Rec. om. ἐν]; ii. 6 sq. 10,13; 1 Tim.i.14; 2 Tim.i. 1,13; ii-1; 1 Pet. iii. 16; v.10; στήκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, Phil. iv. 1; iva εὑρεθῶ ἐν αὐτῷ, that I may be found (by God and Christ) most intimately united to him, Phil. iii. 9; εἶναι ἐν Χριστῷ "Inc. 1 Co. i. 30; οἱ ἐν Xp. "Ina. Ro. viii. 1; 1 Pet. v. 14; κοιμᾶσθαι ἐν Χριστῷ, θνήσκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, to fall asleep, to die, mindful of relationship to Christ and confiding in it [W. u.s.], 1 Co. xv. 18; Rey. xiv. 13. Since such union with Christ is the basis on which actions and virtues rest, the expression is…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐν 210 contract—time of Augustus) ἱμάτια γυναικεῖα ἐν apyv(plov) δραχμαῖς ἑκατόν, P Oxy IV. 7247 (A.D. 155) ἐξ ὧν ἔσχες τὴν πρώτην δόσιν ἐν δραχμαῖς τεσσαράκοντα, 70. I. 565 (A.D. 211) δανειζομένη. .. ἀργύριον ἔντοκον ἐν δραχμαῖς ἑξακισχειλίαις, and P Grenf II. 778 (iii/iv a.p.) (=Selections, Pp. 120) το]ὺς μισθοὺς. . ὄντας ἐν δραχμαῖς τριακοσίαις τεσσαράκοντα. Similar are P Oxy IV. 7084 (a.p. 188) yopou . . ἐν (1vpod)(apraBats) ’B, BGU 1. 724 (a.p. 191) ἐξέκοψαν πλεῖστον τόπον ἐν ἀρούραις πέντε: with which may be compared Eph 2!° τὸν νόμον τῶν ἐντολῶν ἐν δόγμασιν, “consisting in.” In P Lond 9215 (ii/iii a.p.) (ΞΞ 111. P- 134) γεγονέναι ἐν ἀμπέλῳ = ‘to be planted with vines.” A predicative use of ἐν is seen in P Hib I. 421° (B.c. 262) δώσομεν Λευκίωι ἐν ὀφειλήματι, ‘asa debt,” P Petr I. 1215 (cf. II. p. 22) ὅσα δὲ ᾿Αξιοθέα προσενήνεγκται ἐμ φερνῆι, “ἐᾷς dowry,” and P Tebt I. 120 135…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐν (en) — in/on/among.

ἐν,

poetry ἐνί, εἰν, εἰνί [Refs 8th c.BC+], forms used by Epic dialect and Lyric Poets as the metre requires, but only as falsa lectio in Trag., εἰν [Refs 5th c.BC+] ἰν [Refs]

__PREP. WITH DAT. AND ACC. Radical sense, in, into.

__A WITH DAT.

__A.I OF PLACE,

__A.I.1 in, νήσῳ ἐν ἀμφιρύτῃ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; with names of cities or islands, as ἐν Ἀθήνῃς, ἐν Τροίῃ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; where ἐν is used, it = in the district of.., ὲν Ἐλευσῖνι [Refs] in my arms, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐν αὑτῷ εἶναι to be in one's senses, be oneself, ἔτ᾽ ἐν σαυτῷ (variant -τοῦ) γενοῦ [Refs 5th c.BC+]

__A.I.1.b ἐν τοῖς ἰχθύσιν in the fish-market, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so ἐν τοῖν δυοῖν ὀβολοῖν ἐθεώρουν ἄν in the two-obol seats, [Refs 4th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐν

en

a primary preposition denoting (fixed) position (in place, time or

state), and (by implication) instrumentality (medially or

constructively), i.e. a relation of rest (intermediate between 1519

and 1537); "in," at, (up-)on, by, etc.:--about, after, against, +

almost, X altogether, among, X as, at, before, between, (here-)by (+

all means), for (... sake of), + give self wholly to, (here-)in(-to,

-wardly), X mightily, (because) of, (up-)on, (open-)ly, X outwardly,

one, X quickly,

X shortly, (speedi-)ly, X that, X there(-in, -on),

through(-out), (un-)to(-ward), under, when, where(-with), while,

with(-in). Often used in compounds, with substantially the same

import; rarely with verbs of motion, and then not to indicate

direction, except (elliptically) by a separate (and different)

preposition.

see GREEK for 1519

see GREEK for 1537

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐν

Prep.

in, on, among

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐν en 2x

followed by the dat., in, Mt. 8:6; Mk. 12:26; Rev. 6:6,; upon, Lk. 8:32; among, Mt. 11:11; before, in the presence of, Mk. 8:38; in the sight, estimation of, 1 Cor. 14:11; before, judicially, 1 Cor. 6:2; in, of state, occupation, habit, Mt. 21:22; Lk. 7:25; Rom. 4:10; in the case of, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐν

e)nprepe)ni/prep ei)nprep ei)ni/prep in, among. c. dat.

Lat. in.

PREP. WITH DAT.:

OF PLACE

in, ἐν νήσῳ, ἐν Τροίῃ, etc., Hom., etc.:—elliptic, ἐν Ἀλκινόοιο (sc. οἴκῳ) Od.; εἰν Ἀΐδαο Il.; ἐν παιδοτρίβου at the school of the training master, Ar.

in, upon, ἐν οὔρεσι Hom., etc.

in the number of, amongst, ἐν Δαναοῖς, etc., Hom.; and with Verbs of ruling, ἄρχειν, ἀνάσσειν ἐν πολλοῖς to be first or lord among many, i. e. over them, id. Hom.; cf. ὁ, τό B. III. 3.

in one's hands, within one's reach or power, Lat. penes, Hom., etc.; ἐν σοὶ γάρ ἐσμεν Soph.; ἐν τῷ θεῷ τὸ τέλος ἦν Dem.

in respect of, ἐν γήρᾳ in point of age, Soph.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

AMONG',

AMONGST', preposition [Gr. See Mingle.]

1. In a general or primitive sense, mixed or mingled with; as tares among wheat.

2. Conjoined or associated with, or making part of the number.

Blessed art thou among women. Luke 1:1.

3. Of the number; as, there is not one among a thousand, possessing the like qualities.

{ A‐mong″ , A‐mongst″ , } prep. [OE. amongist, amonges, amonge, among, AS. onmang, ongemang, gemang, in a crowd or mixture. For the ending -st see Amidst. See Mingle.] 1. Mixed or mingled; surrounded by.

They heard,

And from his presence hid themselves among

The thickest trees.

Milton.

2. Conjoined, or associated with, or making part of the number of; in the number or class of.

Blessed art thou among women.

Luke i. 28.

3. Expressing a relation of dispersion, distribution, etc.; also, a relation of reciprocal action.

What news among the merchants?

Shak.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
79%in
in79% · 2226×with5% · 135×among5% · 132×by4% · 112×on3% · 72×other renderings4% · 116×other renderings1% · 40×

2,833 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 36 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial82%predicate11%object3%subject3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,743 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
καίand, even, also,πᾶςall, the whole, σύ
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςσύεἰμίI am, exist
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the othe
εἰμίI am, exist
Article theκαίand, even, also,οὐNeg
ἐγώ
μετάπατήρfather, Father, εἰς
ἐνamong2743×
what comes after →
Article the
οὐρανόςthe sky, the heaἡμέραa dayκαρδίαthe heart, inner
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,Article theμένωI remain, abide
σύ
εἰμίI am, existμένωI remain, abideκαίand, even, also,
ὅς
καίand, even, also,εἰμίI am, existArticle the
πᾶςall, the whole, ever
Article theτόποςa placeσοφίαwisdom

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐν · 2,743× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Acts John Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Revelation Mark Ephesians Colossians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
I went up now according to a revelation and set before them the gospel that I proclaim among the Gentiles — apart privately however to those esteemed — lest perhaps in vain I may be running or have run.
τοῖςho the G3588 Article · dative · plural · neuter
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Galatians as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-DPN — Article · dative · plural · neuter
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked plural neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-DPN Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Dative Number: Plural Gender: Neuter

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

I went up now according to a revelation and set before them the gospel that I proclaim among the Gentiles — apart privately however to those esteemed — lest perhaps in vain I may be running or have run.
ἔθνεσιν,ethnos Gentiles — G1484 Noun · dative · plural · neuter
162× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Galatians than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means a nation or people, often referring to non-Jewish people. In Matthew 21:43 and Acts 10:35, it describes the Gentiles or nations.
Amplified meaning
non-Jewish people, nations
Tyndale gloss
Gentiles
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἔθνος (i.e., *ethnos*) refers to a multitude or a nation, often distinguished from the Jewish people. It can denote a company of individuals or animals and is frequently used in the New Testament to refer to Gentiles or non-Jews. The term appears in various contexts, including Acts and Matthew, where it highlights the distinction between Jews and other nations.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἔθνος, -ους, τό,

[in LXX chiefly for עַם ,גּוֹי ;]

a multitude, a company, whether of beasts or men (Hom.).

a nation, people: Mt 21:43 24:7, Mk 13:8, Lk 22:25, Ac 10:35, al.; in sing., of the Jewish people, Lk 7:5 23:2, Jo 11:48, 50-53 18:35, Ac 10:22 24:3, 10 26:4 28:19.

In pl., as in OT, τὰ ἔ. (like Heb. הַגּוֹיִם), the nations, as distinct from Israel, Gentiles: Mt 4:15 6:32, Ac 26:17, Ro…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἔθνος, -ους, τό; 1. a multitude (whether of men or of beasts) associated or living together ; a company, troop, swarm: ἔθνος ἑταίρων, ἔθνος ᾿Αχαιῶν, ἔθνος λαῶν, Hom. 1]. ; ἔθνος μελισσάων, 2,87; μυιάων ἔθνεα, ib. 469. 2. α multitude of individuals of the same nature or genus, (τὸ ἔθνος τὸ θῆλυ ἢ τὸ ἄρρεν, Xen. oec. 7, 26): πᾶν ἔθνος ἀνθρώπων, the human race, Acts xvii. 26 [but this seems to belong under the next head]. 3. race, nation: Mt. xxi. 43; Acts x. 35, ete.; ἔθνος ἐπὶ ἔθνος, Mt. xxiv. 7; ΜΚ. xiii. 8; οἱ ἄρχοντες, of βασιλεῖς τῶν ἐθνῶν, Mt. xx. 25; Lk. xxii. 25; used [in the sing.] of the Jewish people, Lk. vii. δ; xxiii. 2; Jn. xi. 48, 50-53; xviii. 35; Acts x. 22; xxiv. 2 (3), 10; xxvi. 4; xxviii. 19. 4. (ra) ἔθνη, like 0127 in the O. T., foreign nations not worshipping the true God, pagans, Gentiles, [ οἴ. Trench § xeviii.]: Mt. iv. 15 (Γαλιλαία τῶν ἐθνῶν), vi. 32; [3 Jn. 7…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἔθνος. Hicks in CR i. p. 42f. has shown that ‘‘ Hellenic life found its normal type in the πόλις, and barbarians who lived κατὰ κώμας or in some less organised form were ἔθνη,᾽᾿ and that similarly in the LXX and NT ἔθνος ‘‘ describes the pagan world, outside the Jewish Church,’’ but occasionally stands for the λαός itself, as in Ac 107%, 2477 α΄. In an Impenial rescript of a.p. 198-201 we have a good example of the word = ‘‘ province’ —P Oxy VII. 1020° ᾧ ἡγούplevos] τοῦ ἔθνους τὸν ἀγῶνα τῆς ἀφέσεως ἐκδικ[ήσει, “the praefect of the province shall decide the suit for release” (Ed.): cf. P Strass I. 2219 (iii/A.p.) διατάξεις εἰσὶν τῶν κυρίων περὶ τῶν ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν οἰκούντων, where the editor understands by ἔθνη, ‘“‘provinctae populé Romani,” and the exx. from Greek writers of this usage in Magie p. 59, dA7chzv i. p. 66: see also Deissmann Pax/, p. 100. In the edict regarding the aurum…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἔθνος (ethnos) — Gentiles.

ἔθνος, εος, τό:

(ϝέθνος,[Refs 8th c.BC+]: - number of people living together, company, body of men, ἑτάρων ἔ., ἔ. ἑταίρων, band of comrades, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἔθνος λαῶν host of men, [Refs]; of particular tribes, Αυκίων μέγα ἔ. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; of animals, ἔ. μελισσάων, ὀρνίθων, μυιάων, swarms, flocks, etc., [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἔ. ἀνέρων, γυναικῶν, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἔ. βρότεον, θνατόν, [Refs]; ἔ. τόδε, of the Erinyes, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

2. after [Refs 8th c.BC+], nation, people, τὸ Μηδικὸν ἔ. (γένος being a subdivision of ἔθνος) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἔ. ἠπειρογενές, μαχαιροφόρον, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἔθνος

ethnos

probably from 1486; a race (as of the same habit), i.e. a tribe;

specially, a foreign (non-Jewish) one (usually, by implication,

pagan):--Gentile, heathen, nation, people.

see GREEK for 1486

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἔθνος, ους, τό

n.n.

a race, people, the Gentiles

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἔθνος ethnos 162x

a multitude, company, Acts 17:26; 1 Pet. 2:9; Rev. 21:24; a nation, people, Mt. 20:25; 21:43; pl. ἔθνη, from the Hebrew, nations or people as distinguished from the Jews, the heathen, Gentiles, Mt. 4:15; 10:5; Lk. 2:32

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἔθνος ἔθνος, εος, ἔθω a number of people accustomed to live together, a company, body of men, Il., etc.; ἔθνος λαῶν a host of men, id. Il.; also of animals, swarms, flocks, id. Il., Soph.

after Hom., a nation, people, Hdt., etc.:—in NTest. τὰ ἔθνη the nations, Gentiles, i. e. all but Jews and Christians.

a special class of men, a caste, tribe, Plat., Xen.

sex, id. Xen.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-DPN — Noun · dative · plural · neuter
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked plural neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-DPN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Dative Number: Plural Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

jen'-tilz (goy, plural goyim; ethnos, "people," "nation"): Goy (or Goi) is rendered "Gentiles" in the King James Version in some 30 passages, but much more frequently "heathen," and oftener still, "nation," which latter is the usual rendering in the Revised Version (British and American), but it, is commonly used for a non-Israelitish people, and thus corresponds to the meaning of Gentiles." It occurs, however, in passages referring to the Israelites, as in Ge 12:2; De 32:28; Jos 3:17; 4:1; 10:13; 2Sa 7:23; Isa 1:4; Ze 2:9, but the word (`am) is the term commonly used for the people of God. In the New Testament ethnos is…

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Gentiles

(Heb., usually in plural, goyim), meaning in general all nations except the Jews. In course of time, as the Jews began more and more to pride themselves on their peculiar privileges, it acquired unpleasant associations, and was used as a term of contempt.

In the New Testament the Greek word Hellenes, meaning literally Greek (as in Acts 16:1, 3; 18:17; Rom. 1:14), generally denotes any non-Jewish nation.

Smith's Bible Dictionary

(nations). All the people who were not Jews were so called by them, being aliens from the worship, rites and privileges of Israel. The word was used contemptuously by them. In the New Testament it is used as equivalent to Greek. This use of the word seems to have arisen from the almost universal adaption of the Greek language.

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

A name given by the Hebrews to all those that had not received the Law of Moses. Foreigners who embraced Judaism, they called proselytes. Since the promulgation of the gospel, the true religion has been extended to all nations; God, who had promised by his prophets to call the Gentiles to the faith, with a superabundance of grace, having fulfilled his promise; so that the Christian church is composed principally of Gentile converts, the Jews being too proud of their privileges to acknowledge Jesus Christ as their Messiah and Redeemer. In the writings of Paul, the Gentiles are generally called Greeks, Ro 1:14,16 1Co 1:22,24 Ga 3:28. So also in those of Luke, in the Ac 6:1

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
55%gentiles
gentiles55% · 91×nations20% · 33×nation18% · 30×other renderings4% · 6×other renderings2% · 4×

164 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 11 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial36%subject27%object15%indirect object11%predicate9%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 162 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
πᾶςall, the whole, καίand, even, also,ἐν
καίand, even, also, nam
λαόςa people, the crγλῶσσαthe tongue, a laοὐχίIrg
πᾶςall, the whole, ever
ἀπόἐνεἷςone
ἐκ
λαμβάνωI receive, takeArticle theκαίand, even, also,
ἐπί
ἔθνοςa race, people,
ἔθνοςGentiles —162×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
βασιλείαkingship, sovereArticle theλαόςa people, the cr
Article the
μήNegθεόςGod, a godκόσμοςthe world, unive
ἐπί
ἔθνοςa race, people, ὅςὅσος
ἐγώ
καίand, even, also,ἐπιστέλλωI write, send byπαραγίνομαιI appear, come,
εἰς
Article theὅςαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἔθνος · 162× in the New Testament
Acts Romans Revelation Matthew Luke Galatians Mark Ephesians John 1 Corinthians 1 Peter 1 Thessalonians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament16 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 509 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 3.88c. AD 40

ἐπειδὴ γὰρ πορεύεται ἡ ὑπομονητικὴ ψυχὴ Ῥεβέκκα πυθέσθαι παρὰ θεοῦ, ἀποκρίνεται αὐτῇ, ὅτι „δύο ἔθνη ἐν τῇ γαστρί σού ἐστι, καὶ δύο λαοὶ ἐκ τῆς κοιλίας σου διασταλήσονται, καὶ λαὸς λαοῦ ὑπερέξει, καὶ ὁ μείζων δουλεύσει τῷ ἐλάσσονι“ (Gen.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅτι τῶν ἐθνῶν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκισάντων προσηγορεύθη.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 9.5c. AD 100

λάβε πάλιν: Ἰδού, λέγει κύριος, πάντα τὰ ἔθνη ἀπερίτμητα ἀκροβυστίαν, ὁ δὲ λαὸς οὗτος ἀπερίτμητος καρδίας.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. AD 2nd c. AD 2nd c. BC 4th c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Diog. 23AD 185–AD 186

ὁ κύριος ἡμῶν … τοῦτο τὸ ἔθνος … λομενον πυ … εισθαι πρ … … ἐντολῆς … … εἰδῶσι ἔτους κϛ

P.Sijp. 58AD 101–AD 300

ἀδελφῇ … χαίρειν. … μικρὸν παιδίον … ς φοινίκων … αν αὐτὸν ὡς … ἔθνη κoινὰν … μηχανῶν ἢ ἐρι… ἐπεὶ γὰρ χρείαν σου ἔχω … ἀσπάσασθαι. ἀπο

P.Col. 6 123Tebtynis? (Arsinoites)AD 200

ἀπολαβεῖν σε τὴν νομὴν τῶν χωρὶς συνβάσεως κατεχομένων πρὸς βίαν χωρίων ὁ ἡγούμενος τοῦ ἔθνους κελεύσει … … θαλγη Ἀμβρήλου διὰ Ἀβδομάνχου υἱοῦ. ἀργύριον γυναῖκες δανίζεσθαι καὶ ὑπὲρ ἄλλων

I went up now according to a revelation and set before them the gospel that I proclaim among the Gentiles — apart privately however to those esteemed — lest perhaps in vain I may be running or have run.
κατ᾽kata apart G2596 Preposition
473× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Galatians than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
According to means following or matching something. In the Bible, it's used to talk about things happening in line with God's plan or will, like in Matthew 8:32 and Mark 5:13.
Tyndale gloss
according to
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

κατά (kata) is a preposition used with the genitive and accusative cases, primarily meaning 'down' or 'against.' It indicates direction, motion, or relation, appearing in various contexts such as 'down from' (e.g., Mt 8:32) and 'against' (e.g., Mk 9:40). The word also conveys meanings like 'throughout' and 'according to.' Lexicons note its frequent use in the New Testament, with some variations in application.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

κατά (bef. a vowel κατ’, καθ’; on the freq. neglect of elision, v. Tdf., Pr., 95; WH, App., 146a),

prep. c. gen., acc.,

down, downwards.

C. gen. (WM, § 47, k; Bl., § 42, 2).

C. gen. rei, in local sense;

down, down from: Mt 8:32, Mk 5:13, Lk 8:33, I Co 11:4;

throughout (late usage; Bl., § 42, 2): κ. ὅλης κ.τ.λ., Lk 4:14 23:5, Ac 9:31 10:37;

in a peculiar adjectival phrase: ἡ κ. βάθους πτωχεία, deep or extreme poverty, II Co 8:2.

C. gen. pers., usually in hostile sense;

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

κατά, [on its neglect of elision before a vowel see Tf. Proleg. p. 95; cf. W. § 5, 1a.; B.10; WH. App. p. 1405], a preposition denoting motion or diffusion or direction from the higher to the lower; as in class. Grk., joined with the gen. and the acc. I. With the Genitive (W. § 47, k. p. 381 (357); [B. § 147, 20]); 1. prop. a. down from, down: κατὰ κατά 8 τοῦ κρημνοῦ, Mt. viii. 32; ΜΚ. v.13; Lk. viii. 33; κατέχεεν κατὰ τῆς κεφαλῆς (so that it flowed down from his head [οἷς W. 381 (357) note]; but it is more correct here to omit κατά with LT Tr WH; see καταχέω), Mk. xiv. 3; hence κατὰ κεφαλῆς (a veil hanging down from his head) ἔχων, 1 Co. xi. 4 ([Δ. V. having his head covered] cf. καταπέτασμα [or rather κάλυμμα (q. v.), but 566 ἔχω I. 1b.]). Ὁ. down upon (down into) anything: Acts xxvii. 14 [W. 381 (357) note!; ef. B.D. Am. ed. s. ν. Crete]; trop. 7 κατὰ βάθους πτωχεία reaching down…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

κατά, the favourite preposition of Polybius, by whom it is often used in place of ἐν, eis, and περί (Krebs Pra. p. 4), is also found with considerable variety of application in the NT, where it occurs 73 times c. gen., and 391 times c. acc. (cf. Proleg. p. 105). Brugmann (Awrze Vergletchende Grammazk, p. 479) considers that the earliest use of the word was “‘along ” something, so as to remain in connexion and contact with the object, and from this most of the senses found in the NT can be derived. I. (1) Turning to the construction c. gen. we find that the meaning ‘‘along” has passed into ‘‘down,” a usage not found in ΜΟΥ, in such passages as P Petr II. 18(26)!° (B.c. a ἐπιπεσὼν ἔτυπτεν [ad]t[o]v κατὰ τοῦ τραχήλου, Chest. τοῦ πνοήν: ἐξ Mt 8%, r Cor 114, 2 Cor 8%. (2) This in turn becomes ‘‘ against,” as in Mt τοῦδ, Mk 14°5, e.g. P Eleph 115 (B.c. 311-0) (= Se/ections, p. 4) ὅπου ἂν…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

κατά (kata) — according to.

κατά [κᾰτᾰ],

poetry καταί accusative to [Refs 2nd c.AD+]: preposition with genitive or accusative:— downwards.

__A WITH GEN.,

__A.I denoting motion from above, down from, βῆ δὲ κατ᾽ Οὐλύμποιο καρήνων, κατ᾽ Ἰδαίων ὀρέων, βαλέειν κ. πέτρης, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; καθ᾽ ἵππων ἀΐξαντε[Refs 5th c.BC+] — for κατ᾽ ἄκρης see.{ἄκρα}: Μοῖσα κ. στόματος Χέε νέκταρ [Refs 3rd c.BC+]

__A.II denoting downward motion,

__A.II.1 down upon or over, κ. Χθονὸς ὄμματα πήξας [Refs 8th c.BC+]; of the dying, κατὰ.. ὀφθαλμῶν κέχυτ᾽ ἀχλύς a cloud settled upon the eyes, [Refs]; φᾶρος κὰκ κεφαλῆς εἴρυσσε down over.. , [Refs 8th c.BC+]; [κόπρος] κ. σπείους κέχυτο.. πολλή [Refs]; ὕδωρ κ. Χειρός, see at {Χεί; μύρον κ. τῆς κεφαλῆς καταχέαντες} [Refs…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

κατά

kata

a primary particle; (prepositionally) down (in place or time), in

varied relations (according to the case (genitive, dative or

accusative) with which it is joined):--about, according as (to),

after, against, (when they were) X alone, among, and, X apart, (even,

like) as (concerning, pertaining to touching), X aside, at, before,

beyond, by, to the charge of, (charita-)bly, concerning, + covered,

(dai-)ly, down, every, (+ far more) exceeding, X more excellent, for,

from ... to, godly, in(-asmuch, divers, every, -to, respect of), ...

by, after the manner of, + by any means, beyond (out of) measure, X

mightily, more, X natural, of (up-)on (X part), out (of every), over

against, (+ your) X own, + particularly, so, through(-oughout,

-oughout every), thus, (un-)to(-gether, -ward), X uttermost,

where(-by), with. In composition it retains many of these

Read the full entry →
Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

κατά

Prep.

down from, against, according to, throughout, during

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

κατά kata 473x

down from, Mt. 8:32; down upon, upon, Mk. 14:3; Acts 27:14; down into; κατὰ βάθους, profound, deepest, 2 Cor. 8:2; down over, throughout a space, Lk. 4:14; 23:5; concerning, in cases of pointed allegation, 1 Cor. 15:15; against, Mt. 12:30; by, in oaths, Mt. 26:63; with an acc. of place, in the quarter of, about, near, at, Lk. 10;32; Acts 2:10; throughout, Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

a-part' (badh, "separation," i.e. alone, by oneself; niddah, "uncleanness" i.e. something put away: "an abomination"): In Zec 12:12-14 the former word is used eleven times with powerful effect to indicate the separation of families and the isolation of wives through excessive grief in Jerusalem on account of the slain Messiah. The latter word signifies removal from ceremonial uncleanness (Le 15:19; 18:19; Eze 22:10). In Greek, kat' idian, "by themselves," of marked significance as expressing Christ's desire for privacy in prayer, alone or with His disciples; either in a desert (Mt 14:13); a mountain (Mt 14:23); or a…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
45%according to
according to45% · 215×against12% · 57×in9% · 42×every5% · 24×by5% · 23×on3% · 13×other renderings15% · 72×other renderings7% · 34×

480 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 48 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial86%object5%predicate5%subject3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 473 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
καίand, even, also,πᾶςall, the whole, ἄνθρωποςa man, one of th
αὐτός
ποιέωI do, makeγυνήa woman, wife, mλαλέωI speak, say
καίand, even, also, nam
ἑκατόνIndecμέγαςσύ
οὐNeg
καίand, even, also,ἀλλάbut, exceptἔρχομαιI come, go
ἐγώ
μετάσυλλαμβάνωI seize, appreheγίνομαιI come into bein
κατάapart473×
what comes after →
Article the
νόμοςa law, the Mosaiἔργονwork, labor, actαὐτός
σάρξflesh, body
περιπατέωI walk, conduct ζάωI liveοὐNeg
ἴδιοςone’s own, private,
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,δέbut, on the othe
ἡμέραa day
ἐνεἰμίI am, existκαίand, even, also,
αὐτός
ὅπωςhow, in order thκαίand, even, also,λέγωI say, speak

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκατά · 473× in the New Testament
Acts Romans Luke Hebrews Matthew 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians Ephesians Mark Galatians Colossians Philippians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome The Shepherd of Hermas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 3c. AD 40

ἡ δ’ ἀρχή, καθάπερ ἔφην, ἐστὶ θαυμασιωτάτη κοσμοποιίαν περιέχουσα, ὡς καὶ τοῦ κόσμου τῷ νόμῳ καὶ τοῦ νόμου τῷ κόσμῳ συνᾴδοντος καὶ τοῦ νομίμου ἀνδρὸς εὐθὺς ὄντος κοσμοπολίτου πρὸς τὸ βούλημα τῆς φύσεως τὰς πράξεις ἀπευθύνοντος, καθ’ ἣν καὶ ὁ σύμπας…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.7c. AD 75–95

ἀλλʼ ἐπειδὴ μείζων ἦν ἡ τοῦδε τοῦ λόγου περιβολή, κατʼ αὐτὸν ἐκεῖνον χωρίσας ταῖς ἰδίαις ἀρχαῖς αὐτοῦ καὶ τῷ τέλει τὴν γραφὴν συνεμέτρησα·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 2nd c. BC 6th c. AD 3rd c. BC
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

ἐπρίατο Πετεαρσεμθεὺς Πανοβχούνιος ὡς ἐτῶν μ χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δύο . προπωλητὴς καὶ βεβαιωτὴς τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην πάντων Πετεαρσεμθεὺς ὁ ἀποδόμενος, ὃν ἐδέξατο Πετεαρσεμθεὺς ὁ πριάμενος. Ἑρμίας ὁ

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

ἐπρίατο Πακοῖβις Πατοῦτος ὡς ἐτῶν λ χαλκοῦ δραχμῶν τρισχιλίων . προπωληταὶ καὶ βεβαιωταὶ τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην πάντων Νεχούτης καὶ ὁ σὺν αὐτῷ οἱ ἀποδόμενοι, ὃν ἐδέξατο Πακοῖβις

BGU 3 1000Pathyris99 BC

μελίχρως τετανὸς μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν χαλκοῦ δραχμὰς δισχιλίας καὶ διακοσίας . προπωλητὴς καὶ βεβαιωτὴς τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην πάντων Πανοβχοῦνις ὁ ἀποδόμενος, ὃν ἐδέξατο Εὔνους ὁ πριάμενος. Ἑρμίας ὁ

I went up now according to a revelation and set before them the gospel that I proclaim among the Gentiles — apart privately however to those esteemed — lest perhaps in vain I may be running or have run.
ἰδίανidios privately G2398 Adjective · accusative · singular · feminine
113× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Galatians than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Something that is one's own is private or personal, like in Matthew where Jesus is alone with his disciples.
Amplified meaning
in a personal, confidential manner
Tyndale gloss
one's own/private
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἴδιος (i.dios) means 'one's own' or 'private.' It conveys a sense of personal ownership or belonging, often contrasting with what is public or shared. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts referring to personal property, family, and private matters, such as in John 1:11 and Galatians 6:5. The word can also imply distinctiveness or peculiarity, as seen in various classical texts.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἴδιος, -α, -ον (in Attic usually -ος, -ον),

[in LXX chiefly for pers. suff., also for לָהֶם, etc.; (τὰ ἴ.) בֵּיתוֹ;]

one's own;

of that which is private and personal (in cl. opp. to κοινός, δημόσιος; cf. infr. 3);

of property, friends, home, country, etc. (in cl. opp. to ἀλλότριος; in late writers often, like ἑαυτοῦ, with weakened sense, v. M, Pr., 87 ff.; Deiss., BS, 123 f.): Lk 6:41, Jo 1:42 5:43, Ac 2:6 20:28, I Co 11:21, Ga 6:5, II Ti 1:9, He 7:27, Ju 6, al.; πράσσειν τὰ ἴ., I…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἴδιος, -a, -ov, (in prof. auth. [esp. Attic] also of two term.), [fr. Hom. down]; 1. pertaining to one’s self, one’s own; used a. univ. of what is one’s own as opp. to belonging to another: τὰ ἴδια πρόβατα, Jn. x. 3 sq. 12; τὰ ἱμάτια τὰ ἴδια, Mk. xv. 20 RG Tr (for which T τὰ ἴδ. in. αὐτοῦ, L WII τὰ ig. αὐτοῦ); τὸ ἴδιον (for his own use) κτῆνος, Lk. x. 34; διὰ τοῦ ἰδίου αἵματος, Heb. ix. 12; xiii. 12, (ἰδίῳ αἵματι, 4 Mace. vii. 8); τὸ ἴδιον μίσθωμα, which he had hired for himself (opp. to ἡ ξενία [q. v-], 23), Acts xxviii. 30; add, Jn. v.43; vii. 18; Acts iii. 12; xiil. 36; Ro. xi. 24; xiv. 4 sq.3 1 Co. iii. 8 (ἴδιον κόπον) ; vi. 185 vii. 4,37; ix. 7; xi. 21; Gal. vi.5; 1 Tim. ill. 4,12; v. 4; 2 Tim.i.9; iv. 3; πράσσειν τὰ ἴδια, to do one’s own business (and not intermeddle with the affairs of others), 1 Th. iv. 11; ἰδία ἐπίλυσις, an interpretation which one thinks out for himself, opp.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἴδιος (A.D. 156) ἐγνώρισα τὴν ἰδίαν μου σφραγῖδα, 75. 49 515 (A.D. 181-9) γράψω τῇ ἰδίᾳ μου χειρί, BGU III. 865? (}Α.}.} ἀκολούθως τῇ ἰδ]ίᾳ σοι (1. σου) ἐπιστολῇ, 73. I. 1315 (A.D. 280) ἐκδικήσωμεν. . τοῖς ἰδίοις ἑαυτῶν δαπανήμασιν, Ρ Grenf II. 801 (A.D. 402) ὑπὲρ ἰδίας σου κεφαλῆς. It will hardly be denied, however, that in all these passages ἴδιος adds a certain emphasis, and this undoubtedly holds good of the general NT usage, as e.g. Jn 141, 1 Cor 3°, Gal 6°, Heb 7*7, etc.: see more particularly Pro/eg. p. 87 ff. (as against Deissmann BS p. 123 f.), and cf. Souter (Zex. s.v.) where the word is rendered ‘‘one’s own,’’ ‘‘ belonging to one,” ‘‘private,’’ ‘* personal,” without any mention of a weaker meaning. Winer-Schmiedel G7 § 22, 17, on the other hand, claims for the word both senses in the NT, and illustrates these in detail. It is probably impossible to draw the line strictly, so…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἴδιος (idios) — one's own/private.

ἴδιος [ῐδ], α, ον,

Attic dialect also ος, ον [Refs 5th c.BC+]:

I. one's own, pertaining to oneself: hence,

I.1. private, personal (opposed to κοινός): twice in [Refs 8th c.BC+] this business is private, not public, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἴδιος ἐν κοινῷ σταλείς embarking as a private man in a public cause, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἰ. στόλῳ χρᾶσθαι, opposed to δημοσίῳ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἴδια πράσσων ἢ στρατοῦ ταχθεὶς ὕπ; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ξυμβόλαια[Refs], etc.; τὰ ἱρά, opposed to τὰ ἴ., temples, opposed to private buildings, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ ἐν ἰδίοις discussion among private persons, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἴδιος

idios

of uncertain affinity; pertaining to self, i.e. one's own; by

implication, private or separate:--X his acquaintance, when they were

alone, apart, aside, due, his (own, proper, several), home, (her, our,

thine, your) own (business), private(-ly), proper, severally, their

(own).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἴδιος, α, ν

Adj

one’s own, private, personal

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἴδιος idios 114x

one’s own, Mk. 15:20; Jn. 7:18; due, proper, specially assigned, Gal. 6:9; 1 Tim. 2:6; 6:15; Tit. 1:3; also used in NT as a simple possessive, Eph. 5:22; τὰ ἴδια, one’s home, household, people, Jn. 1:11; 16:32; 19:17; οἱ ἴδιοι, members of one’s own household, friends, Jn. 1:11; Acts 24:23; ἰδίᾳ, adverbially, respectively, 1 Cor. 12:11

Read the full entry →
Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἴδιος ἴ^διος, η, ον one's own, pertaining to oneself: and so,

private, personal, πρῆξις ἥδ᾽ ἰδίη οὐ δήμιος this business is private, not public, Od.; ἴδιος ἐν κοινῷ σταλείς embarking a private man in a public cause, Pind.; πλοῦτος ἴδιος καὶ δημόσιος private and public wealth, Thuc.; τὰ ἱρὰ καὶ τὸ ἴδια temples and private buildings, Hdt.

τὰ ἴδια, either private affairs, private interests, Thuc.; or one's own property, id. Thuc.; ἴδια πράττειν to mind one's own affairs, Eur.; τὰ ἐμὰ ἴδια Dem.:—in sg., τὸ ἡμέτερον ἴδιον id. Dem.; εἰς τὸ ἴδιον for oneself, Xen.; τοὐμὸν ἴδιον for my own part, Luc.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-ASF — Adjective · accusative · singular · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-ASF Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
82%own
own82% · 96×private8% · 9×his own4% · 5×other renderings4% · 5×other renderings2% · 2×

117 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 9 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial65%object24%indirect object6%subject3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 113 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
εἰςἐνκατά
κατά
αὐτόςτόποςa placeὑψηλόςhigh, lofty
καιρόςfitting season, oppo
μαρτύριονwitness, evidencὅςδέbut, on the othe
γάρfor
μένDisjκαιρόςfitting season,
πατήρfather, Father, ance
καίand, even, also,
ἴδιοςprivately113×
what comes after →
ἀνήρa male human being,
ἵναin order that, sἔχωI have, hold, poἐπερωτάωI interrogate, q
καίand, even, also, nam
ἀκούωI hear, listenἐνἀπαγγέλλωI report, bring
λέγωI say, speak
διάλέγωI say, speakμακάριοςhappy, blessed
αὐτός
οὐNegὑπηρετέωI minister to, sπροφήτηςa prophet, poet
σῶμαbody, flesh
οὐNegἁμαρτάνωI sin

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἴδιος · 113× in the New Testament
1 Corinthians Acts John Matthew 1 Timothy Mark 2 Peter Luke Romans Hebrews Titus Galatians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament18 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 52c. AD 40

πολλαῖς δὲ καὶ ἄλλαις κέχρηται δυνάμεσι τετράς, ἃς ἀκριβέστερον καὶ ἐν τῷ περὶ αὐτῆς ἰδίῳ λόγῳ προσυποδεικτέον.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.7c. AD 75–95

ἀλλʼ ἐπειδὴ μείζων ἦν ἡ τοῦδε τοῦ λόγου περιβολή, κατʼ αὐτὸν ἐκεῖνον χωρίσας ταῖς ἰδίαις ἀρχαῖς αὐτοῦ καὶ τῷ τέλει τὴν γραφὴν συνεμέτρησα·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 5.9c. AD 100

ὅτε δὲ τοὺς ἰδίους ἀποστόλους τοὺς μέλλοντας κηρύσσειν τὸ εὐαγγέλιον αὐτοῦ ἐξελέξατο, ὄντας ὑπὲρ πᾶσαν ἁμαρτίαν ἀνομωτέρους, ἵνα δείξῃ, ὅτι οὐκ ἦλθεν καλέσαι δικαίους, ἀλλὰ ἁμαρτωλούς, τότε ἐφανέρωσεν ἑαυτὸν εἶναι υἱὸν θεοῦ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 6th c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 7th c. AD

ἀποκαταστησάτωσαν εἰς οἶκον τοῖς ἰδίοις ἀνηλώμασιν. ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀποδῶσι καθότι πρόκειται ἀποτεισάτωσαν ἐν τῶι ἐχομένωι μηνὶ ἡμιόλιον παραχρῆμα,

P.Amh. 2 48Pathyris107 BC

μόνιμον ἕως Ἁθὺρ λ τοῦ δεκάτου ἔτους, καὶ ἀποκαταστησάτω εἰς οἶκον πρὸς αὐτὴν τοῖς ἰδίοις. ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀποδῷ ἐν τῷ ὡρισμένῳ χρόνῳ ἀποτεισάτω ἑκάστου κεραμίου χαλκοῦ δραχμὰς χιλίας

P.Adl. 15Pathyris (?)101 BC

Παχὼν τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἔτους καθαρὸν ἀπὸ παντὸς καὶ ἀποκαθεσταμένον εἰς οἶκον ἐν τοῖς πεδίοις ἰδίοις ἀνηλώμασι μέτρῳ ᾧ καὶ παρείληφεν· ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀποδῷ ἐν τῷ ὡρισμένῳ χρόνωι ἢ

I went up now according to a revelation and set before them the gospel that I proclaim among the Gentiles — apart privately however to those esteemed — lest perhaps in vain I may be running or have run.
δὲde however G1161 Conjunction
2,787× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Galatians as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This is a conjunction that means and, but, or then, used to connect ideas like in Matthew 1:2 and 2 Corinthians 6:15.
Tyndale gloss
then
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

δέ (de) is a post-positive particle in Greek, primarily used as a conjunction to connect clauses. It can express contrast (but, on the other hand) or continuation (and, also), and is often used to transition between ideas or to add emphasis. In the New Testament, it appears frequently in various contexts, such as contrasting statements or resuming interrupted discourse, with notable examples in Matthew and 2 Corinthians.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

δέ (before vowels δ’; on the general neglect of the elision in NT, v. WH, App., 146; Tdf., Pr., 96),

post-positive conjunctive particle;

copulative, but, in the next place, and, now (Abbott, JG, 104): Mt 1:2ff., II Co 6:15, 16, II Pe 1:5-7; in repetition for emphasis, Ro 3:21, 22, 9:30, I Co 2:6, Ga 2:2, Phl 2:8; in transition to something new, Mt 1:18 2:19, Lk 13:1, Jo 7:14, Ac 6:1, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

δέ (related to δή, as μέν to μήν, ef. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 355), a particle adversative, distinctive, disjunctive, but, moreover, (W.§ 53, 7 and 10, 2); it is much more freq. in the historical parts of the N. T. than in the other books, very rare in the Epp. of John and the Apocalypse. {On its general neglect of elision (when the next word begins with a vowel) cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 96; WH. App. Ῥ 146; W.§5,1a.; B. p.10sq.] It is used ἘΠ ΟἹ δὲ univ. by way of opposition and distinction; it is added to statements opp. to a preceding statement: ἐὰν yap ἀφῆτε... ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀφῆτε, Mt. vi. 14 sq.; ἐὰν de ὁ ὀφθαλμὸς κτλ. Mt. vi. 23; ἐλεύσονται δὲ ἡμέραι, Mk. ii. 20; it opposes persons to persons or things previously mentioned or thought of, —either with strong emphasis: ἐγὼ δέ, Mt. v. 22, 28, 32, 34, 39,44; ἡμεῖς de, 1 Co. i. 23; 2 Co. x. 13; σὺ δέ, Mt. vi. 6; ὑμεῖς δέ, Mk. viii. 29; of δὲ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

δεῖ. For the conjunctive, as in Mt 26%, cf. P Fay 109° (early i/A.D.) ἐάν σε δῇ (for δέῃ) τὸ εἱμάτιόν σου θεῖναι ἐνέχυρον. “even if you have to pawn your cloak” (Edd.). In P Tebt I. 585° (B.c. 111) we have ἐάν followed by the indicative— ἐὰν δεῖ σε συνπεσεῖν τῶι ᾿Ανικήτωι, σύνπεσαι, ‘if you must meet Anicetus, meet him” (Edd.): cf. Mayser G7. p. 325. Other examples of the verb are l’ Par 461® (B.C. 153) διὸ Kal ἡγούμενος δεῖν ἐπ᾿ ἄλλου μὲν μηθενὸς αὐτῶι διακριθῆναι» P Lille I. 267 (iii.B.c.) περὶ (corr. from πεερὶ) δὲ τούτου τοῦ μέρους δεήσει ἐπισχεῖν, P Tebt 11. 3414 (A.p. 140-1) δεήσι ἐπισταλῆναι εἰς δάνε[ι]α σπέρματα κατασπίο]ρᾶς KTA., “ΕἼ will be necessary to send on account of loans of seedcorn for the sowing,” etc., AécheZ 1001" © (Theran Doric —c. B.C. 200) no one may bring forward a proposal ὡς δεείσῃ διαλῦσαι τὸ κοινὸν εἰ τὰς θυσίας, P Flor II. 133" (A.D. 257) ἔδι μὲν ὑμᾶς μηδὲ…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

δέ (de) — then.

δέ,

but: adversative and copulative Particle,

I. answering to μέν (which see), τὴν νῦν μὲν Βοιωτίαν, πρότερον δὲ Καδμηίδα γῆν καλουμένην [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II. without preceding μέν,

II.1. adversative, expressing distinct opposition, αἰεί τοι τὰ κάκ᾽ ἐστὶ φίλα.. μαντεύεσθαι, ἐσθλὸν δ᾽ οὔτε τί πω εἶπας[Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in Prose, οὐκ ἐπὶ κακῷ, ἐλευθερώσει δέ.. [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II.2. copulative,

II.2. a in explanatory clauses, ξυνέβησαν.. τὰ μακρὰ τείχη ἑλεῖν (ἦν δὲ σταδίων μάλιστα ὀκτώ) [Refs 8th c.BC+]: when a substantive is followed by words in apposition, Ἀρισταγόρῃ τῷ Μιλησίῳ, δούλῳ δὲ ἡμετέρῳ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in answers, διπλᾶ λέγειν. —Answ. διπλᾶδ᾽ ὁρᾶν…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

δέ

de

a primary particle (adversative or continuative); but, and,

etc.:--also, and, but, moreover, now (often unexpressed in English).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

δέ

Cj.

but, on the other hand, and

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

δέ de 2x

a conjunctive particle, marking the superaddition of a clause, whether in opposition or in continuation, to what has preceded, and it may be variously rendered but, on the other hand, and, also, now, etc.; καὶ δέ, when there is a special superaddition in continuation, too, yea, etc. It sometimes is found at the commencement of the apodosis of a sentence, Acts 11:17. It serves also to mark the resumption of an interrupted discourse, 2 Cor. 2:10; Gal. 2:6

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

δέ but: conjunctive Particle, with adversative force: it commonly answers to μέν, and may often be rendered by while, whereas, on the other hand, v. μέν:— but μέν is often omitted, δέ being used merely to pass on from one thing to another; ὣς Ἀχιλεὺς θάμβησεν, θάμβησαν δὲ καὶ ἄλλοι Il.; etc.; κινεῖ κραδίην κινεῖ δὲ χόλον Eur.

δέ is often redundant,

to introduce the apodosis, where it may be rendered by then, yet, εἰ δέ κε μὴ δώωσιν, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι if they will not give it, then I will take it, Il.; so at in Lat., si tu oblitus es, at Dii meminerint Catull.

to resume after interruption caused by a parenthesis, where it may be rendered by I say, now, so then, Hdt.

POSITION of δέ: properly second, being often put between the Art. and Subst., the prep. and case.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
33%now
now33% · 974×however27% · 780×then21% · 620×and12% · 360×but5% · 154×other renderings2% · 49×

2,937 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 15 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,787 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existσύ
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςκύριοςlord, Lord, mastπεντακισχίλιοιfive thousand
εἰCond
παλαιόςold, ancient, woσύεἰμίI am, exist
εἰμίI am, exist
περιπατέωI walk, conduct ἀναπίπτωI lie down, reclμνημεῖονa tomb, sepulche
οὗτος
δίδωμιI offer, giveθεόςGod, a godπίστιςfaith, belief, t
δέhowever2787×
what comes after →
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesusθεόςGod, a godκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
αὐτός
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐπί
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theσύ
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theοὗτοςἸωάννηςJohn
τὶς
Article theαὐτόςὄνομαname, character,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceδέ · 2,787× in the New Testament
Acts Luke Matthew 1 Corinthians John Mark Romans 2 Corinthians Hebrews Galatians James 1 Timothy

2 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
I went up now according to a revelation and set before them the gospel that I proclaim among the Gentiles — apart privately however to those esteemed — lest perhaps in vain I may be running or have run.
τοῖςho to those G3588 Article · dative · plural · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Galatians as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-DPM — Article · dative · plural · masculine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-DPM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Dative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
to those19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

I went up now according to a revelation and set before them the gospel that I proclaim among the Gentiles — apart privately however to those esteemed — lest perhaps in vain I may be running or have run.
δοκοῦσιν,dokeō esteemed — G1380 Verb · present · active · participle · dative · plural · masculine
62× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Galatians than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To think means to have an opinion or suppose something, as in Matthew 24:44 and Luke 12:40. It involves having a thought or idea about something, which may or may not be true.
Amplified meaning
esteemed, respected
Tyndale gloss
to think
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

δοκέω is a verb meaning to think, suppose, or seem, derived from the notion of opinion. It appears in various contexts in the New Testament, often indicating subjective judgment or perception, such as in Matthew 3:9 and Luke 10:36. The entries suggest it can also imply a sense of reputation or being reputed, as seen in Galatians 2:6. There is a noted distinction in usage between δοκέω and related terms like ἡγέομαι and νομίζω, which convey different nuances of belief and judgment.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

δοκέω, -ῶ

(< δόκος, opinion, < δέκομαι, Ion, form of δέχ-),

[in LXX for טוֹב, נָדַב, etc. ;]

to be of opinion, suppose: Mt 24:44, Lk 12:40, He 10:29; c. inf., Mt 3:9, Lk 8:18 24:37, Jo 5:39 16:2, Ac 12:9 27:13, I Co 3:18 7:40 8:2 10:12 14:37, Ga 6:3, Phl 3:4, Ja 1:26; c. acc et inf., I Co 12:23, II Co 11:16; seq. ὅτι, Mt 6:7 26:53, Mk 6:49,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

δοκέω, -ὥ ; impf. ἐδόκουν ; 1 aor. ἔδοξα ; (akin to δέχομαι or δέκομαι, whence δόκος an assumption, opinion, [οἵ. Lat. decus, decet, dignus; Curtius § 15; cf. his Das Verbum, i. pp. 376, 3821}; [fr. Hom. down]; 1. to be of opinion, think, suppose : foll. by ace. with inf., Mk. vi. 49 [RG L Tr]; 2 Co. xi. 16; 1 Co. xii. 23 ; with an inf. relating to the same subject as that of δοκέω itself, Lk. viii. 18 (ὃ δοκεῖ ἔχειν) ; xxiv. 37 (ἐδόκουν πνεῦμα θεωρεῖν) ; In. v. 39; xvi. 2; Acts xii. 9; xxvii. 13; 1 Co. iil. 18; vii. 40; vili. 25 x. 12; xiv. 375 Gal. vi. 3; Phil. ni.4; Jas. 1. 26, μὴ δόξητε λέγειν ἐν ἑαυτοῖς do not suppose that ye may think, Mt. iii. 9; οἵ. Fritzsche ad loe. [0]]. by ὅτι, Mt. vi. 7; xxvi. 53; [Mk. vi. 49 T WH]; Lk. xii. 51; xiii. 2, 4; xix.11; Jn. v. 45; xi. 13, [81 T Tr WH]; xiii. 29; xx. 15; 1 Co. iv. 9; 2 Co. xii. 19; Jas.iv.5. so used that the object is easily…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

δοκέω. The verb is naturally common, e.g. P Par 4015 (8.6. τ64-58) εἶπα αὐτῷ μὴ ἐμὲ ἀξιοῦν, ἀλλά, δόξαντα ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ ἐν τῇ αὐλῇ εἶναι, παραγίνεσθαι, P Oxy VII. 1027° (i/A.D.) ὑπόμνημα ἀφ᾽ οὗ ἔδοξεν δυνήσασθαι ἐμποδισθῆναί μου τὴν πρᾶξιν, “ἃ memorandum by means of which he hoped that my execution might be prevented ” (Ed.), 26. 1032°8(A.p. 162) ἐάν σου τῇ τύχῃ δόξῃ, “if your fortune sees fit.” exx. of this last phrase we may cite P Petr I. 267 (B.c. 241) ἐάν σοι δοκεῖ, P Oxy IV. 718% (a.b. 180-02) ἐάν σοι δόξῃ, and 76. IX. 12208 (iii/A.b.) ἢ δοκῖ σοι, κύριέ pov, πέμψε por For other

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

δοκέω (dokeō) — to think.

δοκέω

[Refs 8th c.BC+]imperfect ἐδόκουν, Epic dialect δοκέεσκον [Refs 6th c.AD+]: —middle, δοκέοντο [Refs 3rd c.AD+]: participle δοκεύμενος[Refs]: the future and other tenses are twofold:

1. future δόξω and aorist 1 ἔδοξα [Refs 5th c.BC+]perfect δέδοχα inferred from pluperfect ἐδεδόχεσαν [Refs 2nd c.AD+]:—passive, aorist ἐδόχθην [Refs 5th c.BC+]: perfect δέδογμαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]: pluperfect ἐδέδοκτο [Refs]

2. regular forms (chiefly Trag., Comedy texts, and late Prose), future δοκήσω [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Doric dialect δοκησῶ or -ᾱσῶ[Refs 3rd c.BC+]aorist ἐδόκησα, Epic dialect δόκ- [Refs 8th c.BC+]: perfect δεδόκηκα [Refs 4th c.BC+]:— passive, aorist ἐδοκήθην [Refs 5th c.BC+]: perfect δεδόκημαι [Refs 5th c.BC+].; but δεδοκημένος (which see) belongs to…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

δοκέω

dokeo

a prolonged form of a primary verb, doko dok'-o (used only in an

alternate in certain tenses; compare the base of 1166) of the same

meaning; to think; by implication, to seem (truthfully or

uncertainly):--be accounted, (of own) please(-ure), be of reputation,

seem (good), suppose, think, trow.

see GREEK for 1166

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

δοκέω

v.

I think, seem, appear, it seems

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

δοκέω dokeō 62x

to think, imagine, suppose, presume, Mt. 3:9; 6:7; to seem, appear, Lk. 10:36; Acts 17:18; it seems; it seems good, best, or right, it pleases, Lk. 1:3; Acts 15:22, 25

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

δοκέω = videor mihi, to think, suppose, imagine, expect, c. acc. et inf., δοκέω νικησέμεν Il.; οὔ σε δοκέω πείθεσθαι Hdt.; τεκεῖν δράκοντ᾽ ἔδοξεν she thought a serpent bare young ones, Aesch.; ἔδοξα ἰδεῖν, Lat. visus sum videre, methought I saw, Eur.; ἀείδειν δοκῶ I think to sing, Aesch.

absol. to have or form an opinion, περί τινος Hdt.; in parenthetic phrases, ὡς δοκῶ Trag.; πῶς δοκεῖς; how think you? Eur.

δοκῶ μοι in attic, just like δοκεῖ μοι, as Lat. videor mihi for videtur mihi, I seem to myself, methinks, c. inf., Hdt., etc.; also, I am determined, resolved, c. inf., Ar.

c. inf., also, to seem or pretend to be doing, Lat. simulo, or with a negat. to seem or pretend not to be doing, Lat. dissimulo; ἤκουσά του λέγοντος, οὐ δοκῶν κλύειν…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PAP-DPM — Verb · present · active · participle · dative · plural · masculine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PAP-DPM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Dative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
9%think you
think you9% · 6×it seemed good8% · 5×thinks6% · 4×thinking6% · 4×esteemed6% · 4×thought5% · 3×he seems3% · 2×it seems3% · 2×other renderings53% · 34×

64 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 33 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb98%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 62 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
σύ
τίςIrgδέbut, on the otheὅτιthat, since, bec
Article the
δέbut, on the otheὅτιthat, since, becὥστεso that, therefo
τὶς
εἰCondδέbut, on the othe
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakἀποκτείνωI put to death, τίςIrg
μήNeg
καίand, even, also,ἵναin order that, s
δοκέωesteemed —62×
what comes after →
ὅτιthat, since, because
Article theοὐNegφάντασμαan apparition, g
Article the
δέbut, on the otheυἱόςa son, descendenἀπόστολοςan apostle, a me
γάρfor
Article theὅτιthat, since, bec
σύ
γίνομαιI come into beinὅτιthat, since, bec
αὐτός
ὅτιthat, since, becπαιδεύωI discipline, ed

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceδοκέω · 62× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew 1 Corinthians Acts John Galatians Hebrews 2 Corinthians James Mark Philippians
Across the New Testament11 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 20 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 21c. AD 40

εἰ γάρ τις ἐθελήσειε τὴν αἰτίαν ἧς ἕνεκα τόδε τὸ πᾶν ἐδημιουργεῖτο διερευνᾶσθαι, δοκεῖ μοι μὴ διαμαρτεῖν σκοποῦ φάμενος, ὅπερ καὶ τῶν ἀρχαίων εἶπέ τις, ἀγαθὸν εἶναι τὸν πατέρα καὶ ποιητήν·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.44c. AD 75–95

φύλλοις οὖν ἑαυτοὺς συκῆς ἐσκέπασαν καὶ ταῦτα πρὸ τῆς αἰδοῦς προβαλόμενοι μᾶλλον ἐδόκουν εὐδαιμονεῖν ὡς ὧν πρότερον ἐσπάνιζον εὑρόντες.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 8.1c. AD 100

Τίνα δὲ δοκεῖτε τύπον εἶναι, ὅτι ἐντέταλται τῷ Ἰσραὴλ προσφέρειν δάμαλιν τοὺς ἄνδρας, ἐν οἷς εἰσὶν ἁμαρτίαι τέλειαι, καὶ σφάξαντας κατακαίειν, καὶ αἴρειν τότε τὴν σποδὸν παιδία καὶ βάλλειν εἰς ἄγγη καὶ περιτιθέναι τὸ ἔριον τὸ κόκκινον ἐπὶ ξύλον ʽἴδε…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. BC 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Edg. $1Arsinoites245 BC

αὐτὸν οὐκ ἀποδέδωκεν, ἀλλὰ παρείλκυκέν με ἕως τοῦ νῦν. δέομαι οὖν σου, εἴ σοι δοκεῖ, προστάξαι Ἀγήνορι τῶι στρατηγῶι ἀνακαλέσαι αὐτὸν καὶ, ἐὰν ἦι ἀληθῆ, ἐπαναγκάσαι αὐτὸν κομισάμενον τὰς

r … γενέθλια τοῦ βασιλέως καὶ βασιλίσσης οἴνου παλαιοῦ εὐώδους κεράμια ὅσα ἄν σοι δόξῃ, ὡσαύτως δὲ καὶ ἱερεῖα … προαπο … ν … εἰς τὴν ἑορτὴν

P.Edg. $1Philadelphia? (Arsinoites)241 BC

ἤρξατο Ἀμμώνιος τὰς ὠνὰς ἐπικηρύσσειν. γίνωσκε δὲ καὶ τὰ βαλανεῖα μισθούμενα ἀνυπόλογα παντὸς ὑπολόγου. ἔδοξεν οὖν μοι μηθὲν ὑποστῆναι ἕως τοῦ σε παραγενέσθαι. ἐὰν οὖν εὔκαιρόν σοι ἦι, παραγενοῦ,

I went up now according to a revelation and set before them the gospel that I proclaim among the Gentiles — apart privately however to those esteemed — lest perhaps in vain I may be running or have run.
μή lest G3361
1,060× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Galatians as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Not is a word used to show that something is not true or is not happening, like in phrases that say 'lest' or 'God forbid', as seen in various parts of the New Testament.
Tyndale gloss
not
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

μή () is a Greek negative particle used to express subjective negation, often in conditional or hypothetical contexts. It contrasts with οὐ (ou), which indicates absolute denial. μή can function as an adverb meaning 'not' or as a conjunction meaning 'lest.' It appears in various grammatical constructions, including prohibitions and deliberative questions, and is referenced in verses like Matthew 5:29 and John 3:18.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

μή,

subjective negative particle,

used where the negation depends on a condition or hypothesis, expressed or understood, as distinct from οὐ, which denies absolutely. μή is used where one thinks a thing is not, as distinct from an absolute negation. As a general rule, οὐ negatives the indic., μή the other moods, incl, ptcp. [In LXX for אֵין, אַיִן, אַל.]

As a neg. adv., not;

with ref. to thought or opinion: Jo 3:18, Tit 1:11, II Pe 1:9.

In delib. questions, c. subjc. (M, Pr., 185): Mk 12:14, Ro 3:8.

In conditional and final sentences, after εἰ, ἐάν, ἄν, ἵνα, ὅπως: Mt 10:14,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

μή, Sept. for Ox, |X, PN, ἃ particle of negation, which differs from οὐ (which is always an adverb) in that ov denies the thing itself (orto speak technically, denies simply, absolutely, categorically, directly, objectively). but μή denies the thought of the thing, or the thing according to the judgment, opinion, will, purpose, preference, of some one (hence, as we say technically, indirectly, hypothetically, subjectively). This distinction holds also of the compounds οὐδείς, μηδείς, οὐκέτι, μηκέτι, ete. But pris either an ad verb of negation, not (Lat. non, ne); or aconjunction, that... not, lest, (Lat. ne); or an interrogative particle, (Lat. num) [i. e. (generally) implying aneg. ans.; in indir. quest. whether nol (suggesting apprehension) ]. Cf. Herm. ad Vig. § 267 p- 802 sqq-; Matthiae § 608; Bitm. Gram. § 148 (cf. Alex. Bttm. N. T. Gr. p. 344 (296) sqq.); Kiihner ii. §§ 512 sq. p.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

μή Grenf II. 384 (mid. 1.8.6.) καλῶς οὖ]ν ποιήσις μὴ ἀμελήσ[α]ς α[. . ἀγο]ράσαι. .. , P Oxy I. 3815 (a.p. 49--50) (= Selections, p. 53) τοῦ δὲ Σύρου μὴ βουλομένου ἐνμεῖναι τοῖς κεκριμένοις, “45 Syrus does not wish to abide by what has been decided,” 2d. II. 2755 (A.D. 66) (= Selections, p. 58) ἔγραψα ὑπὲρ αὐτοῦ μὴ ἰδότος γράμματα, “1 wrote for him seeing that he was unlettered,” BGU I. 22° (a.p. 114) (= Selections, p. 74) TappovOios . . . τὸ παρὸν μὴ ἔχουσα κύριον, ‘ Tarmuthis at present without a guardian,’ and P Grenf II. 779 (iii/iv A.D.) (= Sedections, p. 120) θαυμάζω πάνυ [ὅτι] ἀλόγως ἀπέστητε μὴ ἄραντες [τὸ σ]ῶμα τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ ὑμῶν, “1 wonder exceedingly that you went off so unreasonably, without taking the body of your brother”; cf. P Tor 1. 1¥8-4 (νον 116) εἰ δὲ kal τις θείηι τὸ μὴ ὄν (cf. 1 Cor 1°8)—acc. and inf. follow, P Ryl II. 144°? (Α.Ὁ. 38) ἐπαγαγεῖν αἰτίας τοῦ μὴ ὄντος, ‘‘…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

μή (mē) — not.

μή,

Elean μά [ᾱ] [Refs 6th c.BC+]. (Cf. Sanskrit mā´, Armenian mi [from I.-[Refs 5th c.BC+] mē´], negative used in prohibitions):—not, the negative of the will and thought, as οὐ of fact and statement; μή rejects, οὐ denies; μή is relative, οὐ absolute; μή subjective, οὐ objective. (A few examples of μηδέ and μηδείς have been included.)

__A in INDEPENDENT sentences, used in expressions of will or wish, command, entreaty, warning,

__A.1 with present imperative, 2 person, μή μ᾽ ἐρέθιζε [Refs 8th c.BC+]: rarely with aorist imperative, μὴ.. ἔνθεο τιμῇ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; in Attic dialect, μὴ ψεῦσον, ὦ Ζεῦ, τῆς.. ἐλπίδος [Refs 8th c.BC+]perfect imperative [Refs 8th c.BC+] person when perfect = present, μὴ κεκράγετε [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

μή

me

a primary particle of qualified negation (whereas 3756 expresses an

absolute denial); (adverb) not, (conjunction) lest; also (as an

interrogative implying a negative answer (whereas 3756 expects an

affirmative one)) whether:--any but (that), X forbear, + God forbid, +

lack, lest, neither, never, no (X wise in), none, nor, (can-)not,

nothing, that not, un(-taken), without. Often used in compounds in

substantially the same relations. See also 3362, 3363, 3364, 3372,

3373, 3375, 3378.

see GREEK for 3756

see GREEK for 3362

see GREEK for 3363

see GREEK for 3364

see GREEK for 3372

see GREEK for 3373

see GREEK for 3375

see GREEK for 3378

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

μή

Neg.prt.

not, lest

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

μή mē 1x

a negative particle, can function as a conj, not, for the particulars of its usage, especially as distinguished from that of οὐ, consult a grammar; as a conj., lest, that not, Mt. 5:29, 30; 18:10; 24:6; Mk. 13:36; μή, or μήτι, or μήποτε, when prefixed to an interrogative clause, it expresses an intimation either of the reality of the matters respecting which the question is asked, Mt. 12:23; or the contrary, Jn. 4:12

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Into Englishhow translators actually render it
71%not
not71% · 772×except9% · 95×unless5% · 58×surely not4% · 41×lest3% · 32×otherwise2% · 23×other renderings4% · 48×other renderings1% · 16×

1,085 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 23 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial84%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,060 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
οὐNeg
καίand, even, also,σύἐγώ
ἵναin order that, so th
αὐτόςσύπροσεύχομαιI pray, pray for
καίand, even, also, nam
ἐγώαὐτόςεἰμίI am, exist
εἰCond
αὐτόςυἱόςa son, descendenκαίand, even, also,
Article the
καίand, even, also,εἰςδιά
μήlest1060×
what comes after →
Article the
πατήρfather, Father, υἱόςa son, descendenσημεῖονa sign, miracle,
ἔχωI have, hold, posses
καίand, even, also,ποιμήνa shepherdβάθοςdepth, a depth,
εἰμίI am, exist
δίδωμιI offer, giveἐνμετά
τὶς
σύὑστερέωI am lacking, faγεννάωI beget, bring f
φοβέωI fear, am terrified
ἀπόArticle theμόνοςalone, but, only

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceμή · 1,060× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew John 1 Corinthians Romans Mark Acts Revelation 2 Corinthians Hebrews 1 Timothy Galatians

2 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 1,321 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

I went up now according to a revelation and set before them the gospel that I proclaim among the Gentiles — apart privately however to those esteemed — lest perhaps in vain I may be running or have run.
πως perhaps G4458
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

πώς, an enclitic particle, on which see under εἴπως [i.e ei, LI. 14] and μήπως. P master, chief, prince; cf. Levy, Chald. WB. ib. d. Tar. gumim, ii. p. 401), Rabboni, Rabbuni (apparently [yet cf. reff. below] the Galilean pronunciation of »3)37), a title of honor and reverence by which Jesus is addressed; as interpreted by John, equiv. to διδάσκαλος: Jn. xx. 16; Mk. x. 51, (see ῥαββί). Cf. Keim iii. p. 560 [Eng. trans. vi. p. 311 sq.]; Delitzsch in the Zeitschr. f. d. luth. Theol. for 1876, pp. 409 and 606; also for 1878, p.7; [Ginsburg and Hamburger, as in she preceding word; Kautzsch, Gram. d. Bibl.-Aram. p. 10].

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

πως, enclitic, “ἴῃ some way,” ‘in any way”: P Oxy I. 95% (A.D. 129) ἄλλως πως, “in any other way,” 74. 9305 (iv/A.D.) σπουδάζων] εἴ πὼς ἐκ παντὸς τρόπου δυνηθείης [πρὸς ἡμᾶς] ἀφικέσθαι, ‘being anxious that you should come to us by every possible means in your power” (Edd.), and Syl 510 (=* 364)" (after B.c. 297) ἂν δέ πως ἄλλως πρὸς αὑτοὺς ὁμολογήσωσιν. See also s.v. μήπως. N N le

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

πως (pōs) — how.

πως,

Ionic dialect κως, enclitic adverb of Manner, in any way, at all, by any means, οὐ μέν π. ἅλιον πέλει ὅρκιον [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἀλλὰ μὴ γένοιτό π. [Refs 4th c.BC+]; compare οὔπως, μήπως: frequently after other adverbs of Manner, ὧδέ π. somehow so, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἄλλως π. in some other way, [Refs]; εὐσχημόνως π. [Refs]; sometimes merely to qualify their force, when it cannot be always rendered by any one English equivalent, ἀεί π. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; μάλα π[Refs 5th c.BC+]; μόγις π. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ γὰρ κάταγμα τυγχάνω ῥίψασά π. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀπώκνησάν π. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐάν π. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἤν π. [Refs 5th c.BC+]: expressing uncertainty, I suppose, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

πως pōs 15x

enclitic particle, in any way, by any means, Acts 27:12; Rom. 1:10

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Into Englishhow translators actually render it
75%perhaps
perhaps75% · 12×somehow19% · 3×at all6% · 1×

16 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial7%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 14 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

I went up now according to a revelation and set before them the gospel that I proclaim among the Gentiles — apart privately however to those esteemed — lest perhaps in vain I may be running or have run.
εἰςeis in G1519 Preposition
1,766× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Galatians as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means toward or into, indicating direction or purpose, as seen in Matthew 8:23 and Mark 1:45. It can also imply a sense of movement or action. The KJV translates it in various ways.
Tyndale gloss
toward
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

εἰς is a preposition meaning 'into' or 'to,' used with the accusative case. It indicates direction, entrance, or limit, applicable to place, time, and figurative purposes. The New Testament frequently employs it to express movement toward locations or states, as seen in passages like Matthew 8:23. It can also denote relationships or results, such as 'for' or 'among.'

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

εἰς,

prep. c. acc.,

expressing entrance, direction, limit, into, unto, to, upon, towards, for, among (Lat. in, c. acc.).

Of place.

After verbs of motion;

of entrance into: Mt 8:23 9:7, Mk 1:45, Lk 2:15 8:31, al.;

of approach, to or towards: Mk 11:1, Lk 6:8 19:28, Jo 11:31 21:6, al.;

before pl. and collective nouns, among: Mk 4:7 8:19, 20, Lk 11:49, Jo 21:23, al.;

Of a limit reached, unto, on, upon: Mt 8:18, 21:1, Mk…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

εἰς, a Prep. governing the Accusative, and denoting entrance into, or direction and limit: into, to, towards, for, among. It is used A. Property I. of Place, after verbs of going, coming, sailing, flying, falling, living, leading, carrying, throwing, sending, etc. ; 1. of a place entered, or of entrance into a place, into; and 8. it stands before nouns designating an open place, a hollow thing, or one in which an object can be hidden: as εἰς (τὴν) πόλιν, Mt. xxvi. 18; xxviii. 11; Mk. i. 45, and often; εἰς r. οἶκον, Mt. ix. 7; συναγωγήν, Acts xvii. 10; πλοῖον, Mt. viii. 23; Jn. vi. 17; Acts xxi. 6; θάλασσαν, Mt. xvii. 27; ἄβυσσον, Lk. viii. 31; οὐρανόν, Lk. ii. 15; κόσμον, In. 1. 9; iii. 19, ete.; τὰ ἴδια, Jn. i. 11; xvi. 32; Acts xxi. 6; ἀποθήκην, Mt. iii. 12; εἰς ra ὦτα, Lk. i. 44; εἰς τὰς ζώνας or ζώνην, Mt. x. 9; Mk. vi. 8, etc.; εἰς ἀέρα, 1 Co. xiv. 9; eis πῦρ, Mk. ix. 22, ete.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

εἰς ἁλιέων εἰς ᾿Αλεξάνδριί[αν (P Oxy II. 2943 = Selections, Ρ- 34): see further Pro/eg. pp. 234 f., 245. For εἰς in the wide sense in which we use ‘‘for” we may cite such passages as P Lille I. 261 (iii/B.c.) ἔγραψάς μοι περὶ τῆς εἰς THY σησαμείαν γῆς, 20." ἕως ἂν] μάθωμεν περὶ τῶν κ[εχρ]ηματισμένων εἰς τὸν νομόν, P Petr II. 11 (1)" (mid. iii/B.c.) (= Witkowski*, p. 8) ἀπὸ τούτου τὸ μὲν ἥμυσυ εἰς τὰ δέοντα ὑπελιπόμην, τὸ δὲ λοιπὸν εἰς τὸ δάνειον κατέβαλον, P Lond 43? (ii/B.c.) (=I. p. 48, Witkowski’, p- 110) ἕξεις ἐφόδιον εἰς τὸ γῆρας, P Tebt I. 577 (8.6. 118) προστε]τάχασι δὲ καὶ τὰ els τὴν ταφὴν τοῦ “Amos, P Oxy I. 379 (A.D. 149) (= Selections, p. 49) ἐγένετο ἐνθάδε ἡ τροφεῖτις εἰς υἱὸν tod ΤΠεσούριος, ‘‘there was concluded here the nursing-contract for the son of Pesouris”; and the recurring formulae in a private account of ς. A.D. 15 τό. 1V. 736° θρύων εἰς τοὺς ἄρτους (ὀβολοὶ δύο)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

εἰς (eis) — toward.

ἐν εἰς

or ἐς, PREP. WITH ACC. ONLY:—both forms are found in [Refs 8th c.BC+], Ionic dialect poets, and early metrical Inscrr.; ἐς is best attested in [Refs 5th c.BC+], and is found in nearly all early Ionic dialect Inscrr. (except [Refs 5th c.BC+]; and usually in Attic dialect Prose (except [Refs 5th c.BC+] is used before vowels for the sake of meter; ἐς was retained in the phrases ἐς κόρακας (whence the Verb σκορακίζω), ἐς μακαρίαν. Aeolic dialect poets have εἰς before vowels, ἐς before consonants, and this is given as the rule in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; compare ἐν, ἰν. The diphthong is genuine in Aeolic dialect εἰς, but spurious in Attic dialect-Ionic dialect) Radical sense into, and then more loosely, to:

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

εἰς

eis

a primary preposition; to or into (indicating the point reached or

entered), of place, time, or (figuratively) purpose (result, etc.);

also in adverbial phrases:--(abundant-)ly, against, among, as, at,

(back-)ward, before, by, concerning, + continual, + far more

exceeding, for (intent, purpose), fore,

+ forth, in (among, at, unto, -so much that, -to), to the

intent that, + of one mind, + never, of, (up-)on, + perish, + set at

one again, (so) that, therefore(-unto), throughout, til, to (be, the

end, -ward), (here-)until(-to), ...ward, (where-)fore, with. Often

used in composition with the same general import, but only with verbs

(etc.) expressing motion (literally or figuratively).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

εἰς

Prep.

into, in, among, till, for

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

εἰς

into, to c. acc.

PREP. WITH ACC. ONLY. Radical sense, into, and then to:

OF PLACE, the commonest usage, εἰς ἅλα into or to the sea, Hom., etc.:—properly opposed to ἐκ, ἐς σφυρὸν ἐκ πτέρνης from head to foot, Il.; εἰς ἔτος ἐξ ἔτεος from year to year, Theocr.:—then, with all Verbs implying motion or direction, ἰδεῖν εἰς οὐρανόν Il.; εἰς ὦπα ἰδέσθαι to look in the face, id. Il.:—in Hom. and Hdt. also c. acc. pers., where the attic use ὡς, πρός, παρά.

with Verbs which express rest in a place, when a previous motion into or to it is implied, ἐς μέγαρον κατέθηκε, i. e. he brought it into the house, and put it there, Od.; παρεῖναι ἐς τόπον to go to a place and be there, Hdt.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

A principal thing to notice about this preposition, which in the King James Version represents about 16 Hebrew and as many Greek words and prepositions, is that, in hundreds of cases (especially in the Old Testament, but frequently also in the New Testament) in the Revised Version (British and American) the rendering is changed to more exact forms ("to," "unto," "by," "upon," "at," "with," "among," "for," "throughout," etc.; compare e.g. Ge 6:16; 13:8; 17:7,9,12; 18:1; Ex 8:17; Le 1:9, etc.); while, nearly as often, "in" is substituted for divergent forms of the King James Version (e.g. Ge 2:14; 17:11; 31:54; 40:7; 49:17; Ex…

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 9c. AD 40

τὸ δὲ παθητὸν ἄψυχον καὶ ἀκίνητον ἐξ ἑαυτοῦ, κινηθὲν δὲ καὶ σχηματισθὲν καὶ ψυχωθὲν ὑπὸ τοῦ νοῦ μετέβαλεν εἰς τὸ τελειότατον ἔργον, τόνδε τὸν κόσμον·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅτι λιμοῦ τὴν Χαναναίαν καταλαβόντος εἰς Αἴγυπτον ἀπῆρε καὶ διατρίψας ἐν αὐτῇ τινα χρόνον ὑπέστρεψεν ὀπίσω.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD 2nd c. BC
P.Grenf. 2 33Pathyris101 BC

καὶ τοῖς μετόχοις γῆς σιτοφόρου λεγομένης Νεχθαραῦτι θεοῦ μεγάλου παρὰ τῶν ἱερέων ἐτῶν δέκα εἰς τὰ ἐνλιπόντα αὐτῷ ἑτέρων , τεσσάρων εἰς συμπλήρωσιν ἐτῶν πέντε , ὥστε γεωργῆσαι ἧς

BGU 3 999Pathyris100 BC

καὶ ἀπηλιώτου τὸ λοιπὸν τῆς Εὐνόου οἰκίας λιβὸς ῥύμη ἐφ ᾧ ἀνοίξει τὴν θύραν εἰς τὴν Ὀρσηοῦς οἰκίαν ἢ οἳ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντοθεν. ἐπρίατο Πετεσοῦχος Νεχθανούπιος ὡς ἐτῶν

P.Adl. 17Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)100 BC

ος, βορρᾶ γῆ Σχώτου τοῦ Τρύφωνος, ἀπηλιώτου τὸ λοιπὸν τῆς γῆς, λιβὸς ἡ φέρουσα εἰς τὸ Κρόνειον ὁδός, ἢ οἳ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντοθεν. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου Πέρσης τῆς

I went up now according to a revelation and set before them the gospel that I proclaim among the Gentiles — apart privately however to those esteemed — lest perhaps in vain I may be running or have run.
κενὸνkenos vain G2756 Adjective · accusative · singular · neuter
18× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Galatians than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means something is empty, either literally or figuratively, as seen in Ephesians 5:6 and Colossians 2:8. It can describe empty words or actions that have no purpose or value. The Bible uses this word to emphasize the importance of meaningful actions.
Amplified meaning
without result, to no purpose
Tyndale gloss
empty
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

κενός is an adjective meaning 'empty' or 'vain.' It can describe things that contain nothing or are devoid of value, as seen in various contexts in the New Testament, such as in Mark 12:3 and 1 Corinthians 15:10. The term also applies to people, indicating being empty-handed or lacking spiritual substance, as noted in James 2:20. The lexicons agree on its primary meanings, with no significant disagreement.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — κενός, μάταιος from a scan

THESE words nowhere in the N.T. occur together; but on several occasions in the Septuagint, as for instance at Job xx. Seen Xk es οὐ! 1%. Δ. clos ἐσ ie nC lemontaor Rome, Cor. 6; and not unfrequently in classical Greek; as in Sophocles (Hlec. 324); in Aristotle (Hthic. Nic. i. 2. 1); and in Plutarch (Adv. Colot. 17). We deal with them here solely in their ethical use; for seeing that μάταιος knows, at least in Scripture, no other use, it is only as ethically employed that κενός can be brought into comparison with it, or the words made the subject of discrimination. The first, κενός, is ‘ empty,’ ‘ leer,’ ‘ gehaltlos,’ ‘ inanis’ ; the second, μάταιος, ‘ vain,’ ‘ eitel ’ (‘idle’), ‘ erfolglos,’ ‘ vanus.’ In the first is characterized the hollowness, in the second the aimlessness, or, if we may use the word, the resultlessness, connected as it is with μάτην, of that to which this epithet…

Read the full entry →
Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

κενός, -ή, -όν,

[in LXX chiefly for ריק and cognate forms;]

empty (Ge 37:24, Jg 7:16). Metaph.,

empty, vain: λόγοι, Eph 5:6; ἀπάτη, Col 2:8; κήρυγμα, πίστις, I Co 15:14;

vain, fruitless: ἡ χάρις, I Co 15:10; κόπος, I Co 15:58; ἡ εἴσοδος, I Th 2:1; κενά, Ac 4:25(LXX); εἰς κενόν, in vain, to no purpose (Diod., LXX; cl. διὰ κενῆς),

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

κενός, -7, -όν, [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for DP, Ps PD ete., empty ; 1. prop. of places, vessels, ete., which contain nothing (Judg. vii. 16; Gen. xxxvii. 24); metaph. empty, vain; devoid of truth: λόγοι, Eph. v. 6 (Ex. v. 9); ἀπάτη. Col. ii. 8; κήρυγμα, πίστις, 1 Co. xy. 14. 57 of men, empty-handed; without a gift: ἀποστέλλειν and ἐξαποστέλλειν τινὰ κενόν (Gen. xxxi. 42; Deut. xv. 13; xvi. 16), Mk. xii.3; Lk.i.53; xx.10sq.; metaph. des¢itute of spiritual wealth, of one who boasts of his faith as a transcendent possession, yet is without the fruits of faith, Jas. ii. 20. 3. metaph. of endeavors, labors, acts, which result in nothing, vain, fruitless, without effect: ἡ χάρις. 1 Co. xv. 10; κόπος, ib. 58; ἡ εἴσοδος, 1 Th. ii. 1; neut. plur. κενά, things that will not succeed, Acts iv. 25 (fr. Ps. ii. 1); εἰς κενόν, in vain, to no purpose, [ef. W. 592 (551)]: 2 Co. vi.1; Gal. ii. 2; Phil.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

κενός (kenos) — empty.

κενός, ή, όν,

Ionic dialect and poetry κεινός [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Epic dialect also κενεός, as always in [Refs 8th c.BC+] (except in Il.[same places], and κενός [Refs 8th c.BC+], and in Doric dialect, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; Aeolic dialect κέννος, accusative to Greg. Cor.p.610 [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but οἱ Αἰολεῖς.. οὐ λέγουσι κέννος Choerob.in [Refs], from κενϝος, kenevos,[Refs 5th c.AD+] κενευϝός [Refs]

I. mostly of things, empty, opposed to πλέως, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; opposed to πλήρης, [Refs]; opposed to μεστός, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὸ κ. (i.e. τάλαντον) the empty one, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; χώματα κεινά, ={κενοτάφια}, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κατέθισαν ἐπὶ κενευϝῶν (i.e. τάφων genitive singular) [Refs 5th c.AD+]; κ. χρόνος a pause in music, Anon.[Refs 1st c.AD+]; of wool and wine, uncertain meaning in…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

κενός

kenos

apparently a primary word; empty (literally or figuratively):--empty,

(in) vain.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

κενός, ή, όν

Adj

empty, vain, hollow

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

κενός kenos 18x

empty; having nothing, empty-handed, Mk. 12:3; met. vain, fruitless, void of effect, Acts 4:25; 1 Cor. 15:10; εἰς κενόν, in vain, to no purpose, 2 Cor. 6:1; hollow, fallacious, false, Eph. 5:6; Col. 2:8; inconsiderate, foolish, 1 Thess. 3:5; Jas. 2:20

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

κενός of things, empty, opp. to πλέως or πλήρης, Hom., Hdt., attic

metaph. empty, vain, κενὰ εὔγματα Od.; κ. ἐλπίς Aesch., etc.:—in adverbial usages, neut. pl., κενεὰ πνεύσας Pind.; διὰ κενῆς to no purpose, in vain, Ar., Thuc.

of persons,

c. gen. void, destitute, bereft, τοῦ νοῦ, φρενῶν Soph.; συμμάζων Eur.

empty-handed, Hom., Hdt., attic:— bereft of her mate, λέαινα Soph.: — empty of wit, empty-headed, id. Soph., Ar.

comp. and Sup. κενώτερος, -ώτατος, Plat., etc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-ASN — Adjective · accusative · singular · neuter
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-ASN Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

van: The adjective of "vanity," and representing the same Hebrew and Greek words as does the latter, with a few additions (chiefly kenos, "empty," and its compounds in the New Testament). And "vain" can always be replaced by its synonym "empty," often with advantage in modern English (Job 15:2; 1Co 15:14, etc.). The exception is the phrase "in vain," and even there the interchange can be made if some (understood) noun such as "ways" be added. So "to take God's name in vain" (Ex 20:7; De 5:11) means simply to take it for an "empty" ("not good") purpose.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
39%vain
vain39% · 7×void17% · 3×empty17% · 3×empty-handed17% · 3×vain things?6% · 1×foolish6% · 1×

18 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 6 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial50%predicate28%second object11%object6%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 18 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
εἰς
μήNegπῶςοὐNeg
ἐξαποστέλλωI send forth
πλουτέωI become richἀτιμάζωI disgrace, dish
οὐNeg
ἐγώὅτιthat, since, bec
ἀποστέλλωI send forth, send,
καίand, even, also,
δέρωI flay, flog, scourg
αὐτός
κενόςvain18×
what comes after →
γίνομαιI come into being, a
ἀλλάbut, exceptArticle the
τρέχωI run, exercise myse
DisjοὐδέNeg
ἄραDisj
Article the
καίand, even, also, nam
Article the
ἐν
κύριοςlord, Lord, mast

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκενός · 18× in the New Testament
1 Corinthians Luke 1 Thessalonians Philippians 2 Corinthians Acts Colossians Ephesians Galatians James Mark
Across the New Testament11 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 51 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Polycarp The Didache
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 29c. AD 40

ὧν τὸ μὲν ἐπεφήμισε σκότος, ἐπειδὴ μέλας ὁ ἀὴρ τῇ φύσει, τὴν δ’ ἄβυσσον, πολύβυθον γὰρ τό γε κενὸν καὶ ἀχανές·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.166c. AD 75–95

Τῶν γὰρ Αἰγυπτίων διαφόροις ἀρεσκομένων ἔθεσι καὶ τὰ παρʼ ἀλλήλοις ἐκφαυλιζόντων νόμιμα καὶ διὰ τοῦτο δυσμενῶς ἐχόντων πρὸς ἀλλήλους, συμβαλὼν αὐτῶν ἑκάστοις καὶ διαπτύων τοὺς λόγους οὓς ἐποιοῦντο περὶ τῶν ἰδίων κενοὺς καὶ μηδὲν ἔχοντας ἀληθὲς…

The DidacheThe Didache 2.5c. AD 100

οὐκ ἔσται ὁ λόγος σου ψευδής, οὐ κενός, ἀλλὰ μεμεστωμένος πράξει,

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD 6th c. AD
JJP 16 - 17 (1971), p. 137 [9758]Karanis (Arsinoites)AD 147

παρέσχηκε διὰ πύλης Καρανίδος ἐρημοφυλακίας Σύρος ἐξάγων καμήλους κενοὺς δύο . ἔτους δεκάτου Ἀντωνείνου Καίσαρος τοῦ κυρίου Φαρμοῦθι ἑβδόμῃ καὶ εἰκάδι κζ Καρανίδοσ

P.Ross.Georg. 2 29AD 101–AD 200

δ κνήκου κεράμια β φακοῦ ἀρτάβη α χορτοσπέρμου ἀρτάβη α ἄλλα ὁμοίως ἐν σφυρῖδι κενῇ μέτρα βόες τέλειαι δ μόσχος τέλειος α ἄλλοι ὑποδεέστεροι β

P.Stras. 8 790Theadelphia (Arsinoites)AD 160

καὶ ἐν τῷ Ἀριστοδήμου ἀρουρ δ προσόδων ἑξηκονταρούρου ἀρουρ α 𐅵 … ἐν τοῖς κενοῖς ἐδάφεσι ἀρουρ δ καὶ ἐν τῷ Ἀριστοδήμου ἀρουρ δ προσόδων ἑξηκονταρούρου ἀρουρ … 𐅵

I went up now according to a revelation and set before them the gospel that I proclaim among the Gentiles — apart privately however to those esteemed — lest perhaps in vain I may be running or have run.
τρέχωtrechō I may be running G5143 Verb · present · active · subjunctive · first person · singular
20× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Galatians than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means to run or walk hastily, used in passages like Mark 5:6 and John 20:2 to describe physical movement. It can also be used metaphorically to describe effort or swiftness, as in Romans 9:16 and Galatians 2:2.
Amplified meaning
striving, laboring
Tyndale gloss
to run
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

τρέχω (trechō) means 'to run' and is used both literally and metaphorically in various contexts. It can refer to physical running, as seen in Mark 5:6 and John 20:2, or to striving towards a goal, as in Romans 9:16 and Galatians 5:7. The word is built from the root related to running and includes various compound forms. Notably, it appears in the metaphor of a race in Hebrews 12:1.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

τρέχω

[in LXX chiefly for רוּץ ;]

to run: Mk 5:6, Jo 20:2, 4, I Co 9:24, 26; c. inf., Mt 28:8; seq. ἐπί, Lk 24:12 [T |[WH]| R, mg., om.]; εἰς, Re 9:9; ptcp., δραμών, c. indic., Mt 27:48, Mk 15:36, Lk 15:20. Metaph., from runners in a race, of swiftness or of effort to attain an end: Ro 9:16, Ga 2:2 5:7, Phl 2:16; τ. ἀγῶνα (Hdt., Eur., al.), Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

τρέχω ; impf. ἔτρεχον ; 2 aor. ἔδραμον ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for y95 torun; a. prop.: of persons in haste, Mk. v. 6; Jn. xx. 2,4; with a telic inf. Mt. xxviii. 8; δραμών with a finite verb, Mt. xxvii. 48; Mk. xv. 36; Lk. xv. 20; τρέχω ἐπί with an ace. of place, Lk. xxiv. 12[T om. LTr br. WH reject the vs.]; εἰς πόλεμον, Rey. ix. 9; of those who run in a race-course (ἐν σταδίῳ), 1 Co. ix. 24, 26. b. metaph.: of doctrine rapidly propagated, 2 Th. iii. 1[R.V. run]; by a metaphor taken from the runners in a race, to exert one’s self, strive hard; to spend one’s strength in performing or attaining something: Ro. ix. 16; Gal. v. 7; εἰς κενόν, Gal. ii. 2 [W. 504 (470); B. § 148, 10]; Phil. ii. 16; τὸν ἀγῶνα, Heb. xii. 1 (see ἀγών, 2); the same expression occurs in Grk. writ., denoting to incur extreme peril, which it requires the exertion of all one’s efforts to overcome, Hat. 8, 102; Eur.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

τρέχω in the lit. sense ‘‘ run” occurs in a criminal process of an Alexandrian gymnasiarch before the Emperor Commodus, P Oxy I. 33 versoiii12 (= Chrest. I. p. 35) © ἠβό[κατο]ς εὐθὺς δραμὼν παρέθετο [τῷ] κυρίῳ λέγων, “‘Kipte, κάθῃ, “Ῥωμαῖοι γονγύζο[υσ]ι,᾿ “the veteran forthwith ran and told his lord, saying, ‘ Lord, while you are sitting in judgment, the Romans are murmuring.’’” The same document shows τρέχω in its derived sense ‘‘ strive” —! 1 τρέχε, τέκνον, τελεύτα. κλέος σοί ἐστιν ὑπὲρ τῆς γλυκυτάτης σου πατρίδος τελευτῆσαι, ‘onward, my son, to death, it is a glory for you to die for your beloved country” (Edd.). See also P Lond 1307? (horoscope—i/ii A.D.) (=I. p. 135) μοίρας ἔτρεχε δεκατρεῖς, and J/enandrea p. 73} ἵν᾿ ἀναπηδήσας τρέχῃ, ‘‘that he might jump up and come at a run.” We may add a wooden tablet, apparently for school use, published in Afé/. Weco/e p. 181 (= Katbel Praef.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

τρέχω (trechō) — to run.

τρέχω,

[Refs 8th c.BC+]future θρέξομαι (ἀπο-) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; θρέξω only in [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; but ἀπο-θρέξεις [Refs 5th c.BC+]aorist 1 ἔθρεξα (see. below):—but the usual future and aorist come from the root δραμ-, i.e. δρᾰμοῦμαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ionic dialect δραμέομαι [LXX+6th c.BC+]; δράμομαι in compound ἀναδράμεται [Refs 1st c.AD+]aorist 2 ἔδρᾰμον (see. below): perfect δεδράμηκα [ᾰ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]pluperfect ἐδεδραμήκεσαν (κατ-) [Refs 5th c.BC+]perfect δέδρομα (ἀνα-, ἐπι-) [Refs 8th c.BC+] —passive, perfect δεδράμημαι (ἐπι-) [Refs 5th c.BC+]—The Verb is not common in [Refs 8th c.BC+], who has present in [Refs 8th c.BC+] was also old Attic dialect, epigram cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but the common aorist was ἔδραμον, [Refs 8th c.BC+]—Doric dialect τράχω [ᾰ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]: future θραξοῦμαι [Refs 5th c.AD+]:—run, of men, ἰθὺς δράμε [Refs 8th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

τρέχω

trecho

apparently a primary verb (properly, threcho; compare 2359); which

uses dremo drem'-o (the base of 1408) as alternate in certain tenses;

to run or walk hastily (literally or figuratively):--have course, run.

see GREEK for 2359

see GREEK for 1408

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

τρέχω

v.

I run, exercise myself

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

τρέχω trechō 20x

to run, Mt. 27:48; 28:8; to run a race, 1 Cor. 9:24; met. 1 Cor. 9:24, 26; Heb. 12:1; in NT to run a certain course of conduct, Gal. 5:7; to run a course of exertion, Rom. 9:16; Gal. 2:2; Phil. 2:16; to run, to progress freely, to advance rapidly, 2 Thess. 3:1

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

τρέχω δραμοῦμαι and ἔδραμον from Root ΔΡΕΜ or ΔΡΑΜ to run, Lat. curro, Hom., etc.:—of horses, Il.:—of things, to run, move quickly, Hom., etc.

c. acc. loci, to run over, Eur., Xen.

c. acc. cogn., τρ. δρόμον, ἀγῶνα to run a course, a heat, Eur., etc.: often metaph., ἀγῶνα δρ. to run a risk, id. Eur.; πολλοὺς ἀγῶνας δραμεῖν περὶ σφέων αὐτέων to run many risks for their lives, Hdt.:—sometimes the acc. is omitted, τρ. περὶ ἑωυτοῦ to run the risk of his life, id. Eur.; τρ. περὶ τῆς νίκης Xen.

παρ᾽ ἓν πάλαισμα ἔδραμε νικᾶν he was within one bout of carrying off the victory, Hdt.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PAS-1S — Verb · present · active · subjunctive · first person · singular
present active subjunctive — an action in progress.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PAS-1S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Subjunctive Person: first Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
15%running
running15% · 3×having run15% · 3×run10% · 2×he ran10% · 2×do run5% · 1×i may be running5% · 1×have run5% · 1×you were running5% · 1×other renderings30% · 6×

20 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 14 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb95%adverbial5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 20 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
οὕτωthus, so, in this ma
βραβεῖονa prizeτοίνυνDisj
κενόςempty, vain, hollow
εἰς
εὐθέωςimmediately, soon
καίand, even, also,
μέγας
χαράjoy, gladness
μακρόθενfrom a distance
ἀπό
τρέχωI may be running20×
what comes after →
εἷςone
ἐκδέbut, on the othe
καίand, even, also, nam
προσκυνέωI worshipδοξάζωI glorify, honor
δέbut, on the other ha
τὶςArticle the
ἀπαγγέλλωI report, bring a re
Article the
ἐπιπίπτωI fall upon, press u
ἐπί

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceτρέχω · 20× in the New Testament
1 Corinthians Galatians John Luke Matthew Mark 2 Thessalonians Hebrews Philippians Revelation Romans
Across the New Testament11 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 25 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Polycarp
Philo of AlexandriaOn Joseph 200c. AD 40

κατευξάμενος δ’ ἐκείνῳ καὶ θεοφιλέστατον προσειπών, τὸν ὁμομήτριον περιβλεψάμενος ἀδελφὸν ὡς εἶδεν, οὐ κατασχὼν ἀλλ’ ἤδη νικώμενος ὑπὸ τοῦ πάθους, πρὶν γενέσθαι καταφανής, ἐπιστρέφεται καὶ δραμὼν πρόφασιν ἐπί τι τῶν κατεπειγόντων—ἐκλαλῆσαι γὰρ…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 6.14c. AD 75–95

θέρους γὰρ ὥρᾳ πάντες ἐπὶ τὴν συγκομιδὴν τῶν καρπῶν ἐν ταῖς ἀρούραις ὑπάρχοντες ὡς εἶδον τὴν κιβωτὸν ὑφʼ ἡδονῆς ἁρπαγέντες καὶ τὸ ἔργον ἐκ τῶν χειρῶν ἀφέντες ἔδραμον εὐθὺς ἐπὶ τὴν ἅμαξαν.

PolycarpPolycarp to the Philippians 9.2c. AD 110

πεπεισμένους ὅτι οὗτοι πάντες οὐκ εἰς κενὸν ἔδραμον, ἀλλ̓ ἐν πίστει καὶ δικαιοσύνῃ, καὶ ὅτι εἰς τὸν ὀφειλόμενον αὐτοῖς τόπον εἰσὶ παρὰ τῷ κυρίῳ, ᾧ καὶ συνέπαθον.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. BC
P.Col. 4 115 eArsinoites (?)276 BC–227 BC

χαίρειν. … ν πωλεῖσθαι … ἐν Κροκοδίλων πόλει χόρτον. καλῶς οὖν ποιήσεις … αν δραμὼν περὶ τῆς … … … … … ἵπποι τ … … ολωι … ἀπεστείλαμεν

I went up now according to a revelation and set before them the gospel that I proclaim among the Gentiles — apart privately however to those esteemed — lest perhaps in vain I may be running or have run.
ē or G2228 Particle
343× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Galatians as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Or is a word used to show a choice between two things, like in Matthew 5:17 where it's either obey God's law or not. It's also used to compare things, like in Romans 1:21 where it's one thing or another.
Tyndale gloss
or
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word (ē) is a particle used to indicate distinction, functioning as a disjunctive 'or' and a comparative 'than.' It appears frequently in the New Testament, often in phrases like 'either...or' and in disjunctive questions. Notably, it can also express comparisons after comparative terms, such as in Matthew 10:15. The entries do not show any significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἤ, disjunctive and comparative particle (Bl., §36, 12; 77, 11);

disjunctive, or;

between single words: Mt 5:17, Mk 6:56, Lk 2:24, Jo 6:19, Ro 1:21, al.;

before a sentence expressing a variation, denial or refutation of a previous statement, freq. in interrog. form: Mt 7:4, 9, Mk 12:14, Lk 13:4, Ro 3:29 6:3 9:21, I Co 6:9, 16 9:6, II Co 11:7; ἢ . . . ἤ…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ Χριστοῦ (NVWT ΒΗ Targ. Jonath. ad ᾿ς lili. 10), the kingdom of the Messiah, which will be founded by God through the Messiah and over which the Messiah will preside as God’s vicegerent; ἡ Bac. τῶν οὐρανῶν, only in Matthew, but very frequently [some 33 times], the kingdom of heaven, i. e. the kingdom which is of heavenly or divine origin and nature (in rabbin. writ. nown mao is the rule of God, the theocracy viewed universally, not the Messianic kingdom); sometimes simply ἡ βασιλεία : Mt. iv. 23, ete.; Jas. ii. 5; once ἡ Bac. τοῦ Δαυείδ, because it was supposed the Messiah would be one of David’s descendants and a king very like David, Mk. xi. 10; once also ἡ Bac. τοῦ Χριστοῦ καὶ θεοῦ, Eph. ν. 5. Relying principally on the prophecies of Daniel — who had declared it to be the purpose of God that, after four vast and mighty kingdoms had succeeded one another and the last of…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἢ μή. The general distinction between οὐ and μή is that οὐ is objective, dealing only with facts, while μή is sudjectize, involving will and thought. But in late Greek μή has encroached very largely upon οὐ, with the result that in the NT οὐ is almost entirely confined to the indicative, while μή monopolizes the other moods (but see I. 5). A few exx. of some of the many uses of μή will make this clear. I. Μή negatives (1) the conjunctive (a) after ἐάν (4v)—P Oxy II. 294%? (A.D. 22) (= Selections, p. 36), where certain men are confined to prison, ἐὰν μή τι πίσωσι τὸν ἀρχιστάτορα δο[ῦν]αι etk(= ἱκ)ανόν, ‘* unless indeed they shall persuade the chief usher to give security,’’ BGU II. 5301” \i/a.D.) (= Selections, p. 61) alav (/. ἐὰν) μὴ ἔλθῃς, κινδυνεύω ἐκστῆvat od ἔχω [κλή]ρου, “if you do not come I run the risk of losing the lot (of land) which I possess ”—a father writes to Selections…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἤ (ē) — or.

ἤ,

Epic dialect also ἠέ (in signification [Refs 4th c.BC+], conjunction with two chief senses, Disj. (or) and comparative (than).

__A DISJUNCTIVE, or, ἐγὼ.. ἢ ἄλλος Ἀχαιῶν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; θεόσυτος ἢ βρότειος ἢ κεκραμένη [Refs 4th c.BC+]

__A.2 ἢ.. ἤ either.. or, ἢ νῦν δηθύνοντ᾽ ἢ ὕστερον αὖτις ἰόντα [Refs 8th c.BC+], etc.; so ἢ.. ἤτοι.. [Refs 5th c.BC+] is emphasized, later no distinction is implied, [NT+2nd c.BC+]; ἤ repeated any number of times, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι ἢ τεὸν ἢ Αἴαντος ἰὼν γέρας ἢ Ὀδυσῆος [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἤ is probably wrongly accented in codices of [Refs 8th c.BC+] adverb [Refs 4th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

e

a primary particle of distinction between two connected terms;

disjunctive, or; comparative, than:--and, but (either), (n-)either,

except it be, (n-)or (else), rather, save, than, that, what, yea.

Often used in connection with other particles. Compare especially

2235, 2260, 2273.

see GREEK for 2235

see GREEK for 2260

see GREEK for 2273

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

Disj.prt.

or, than

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἤ ē 343x

can function as a conj (298x), either, or, Mt. 6:24; after comparatives, and ἄλλος, ἕτερος, expressed or implied, than, Mt. 10:15; 18:8; Acts 17:21; 24:21; intensive after ἀλλά and πρίν, Lk. 12:51; Mt. 1:18; it also serves to point an interrogation, Rom. 3:29

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Particle — Particle
particle — a small word colouring the clause; it does not decline.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PRT PaRTicle, disjunctive particle

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

or: The word is used once for either (1Sa 26:10), and is still in poetic use in this sense; as in, "Without or wave or wind" (Coleridge); "Or the bakke or some bone he breketh in his dzouthe" (Piers Plowman (B), VII, 93; compare Merchant of Venice, III, ii, 65). It is also used with "ever" for before (Ps 90:2; Ecclesiasticus 18:19), which the American Standard Revised Version substitutes in Ec 12:6 (compare 12:1,2); So 6:12; Da 6:24.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
84%or
or84% · 304×than13% · 47×other renderings4% · 13×

364 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 9 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial20%object18%subject12%predicate7%verb4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 343 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
σύ
πρόςχείρa handἁμαρτίαa sin
πατήρfather, Father, ance
Article theκακολογέωI speak evil of,Disj
εἰμίI am, exist
οὐρανόςthe sky, the heaἀνεκτόςendurable, tolerθεόςGod, a god
αὐτός
πατήρfather, Father, υἱόςa son, descendenβοῦςan ox
ἀδελφόςa brother
DisjArticle theἐάνCond
or343×
what comes after →
Article the
μήτηρa motherπόλιςa cityδύο
τίςIrg
πίνωI drink, imbibeεἰμίI am, existλαλέωI speak, say
οὐNeg
οἶδαI know, rememberἀναγινώσκωI readδίδωμιI offer, give
ἐν
φυλακήa watching, guarτίςIrgποῖοςIrg
καίand, even, also, nam
ἰχθύςa fishαἰτέωI ask, request, πρός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 343× in the New Testament
Matthew 1 Corinthians Luke Acts Mark Romans 2 Corinthians John 1 Peter Galatians James Ephesians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament24 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 457 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

I went up now according to a revelation and set before them the gospel that I proclaim among the Gentiles — apart privately however to those esteemed — lest perhaps in vain I may be running or have run.
ἔδραμον.trechō have run. G5143 Verb · second aorist · active · indicative · first person · singular
20× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Galatians than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means to run or walk hastily, used in passages like Mark 5:6 and John 20:2 to describe physical movement. It can also be used metaphorically to describe effort or swiftness, as in Romans 9:16 and Galatians 2:2.
Amplified meaning
exerted effort, toiled
Tyndale gloss
to run
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

τρέχω (trechō) means 'to run' and is used both literally and metaphorically in various contexts. It can refer to physical running, as seen in Mark 5:6 and John 20:2, or to striving towards a goal, as in Romans 9:16 and Galatians 5:7. The word is built from the root related to running and includes various compound forms. Notably, it appears in the metaphor of a race in Hebrews 12:1.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

τρέχω

[in LXX chiefly for רוּץ ;]

to run: Mk 5:6, Jo 20:2, 4, I Co 9:24, 26; c. inf., Mt 28:8; seq. ἐπί, Lk 24:12 [T |[WH]| R, mg., om.]; εἰς, Re 9:9; ptcp., δραμών, c. indic., Mt 27:48, Mk 15:36, Lk 15:20. Metaph., from runners in a race, of swiftness or of effort to attain an end: Ro 9:16, Ga 2:2 5:7, Phl 2:16; τ. ἀγῶνα (Hdt., Eur., al.), Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

τρέχω ; impf. ἔτρεχον ; 2 aor. ἔδραμον ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for y95 torun; a. prop.: of persons in haste, Mk. v. 6; Jn. xx. 2,4; with a telic inf. Mt. xxviii. 8; δραμών with a finite verb, Mt. xxvii. 48; Mk. xv. 36; Lk. xv. 20; τρέχω ἐπί with an ace. of place, Lk. xxiv. 12[T om. LTr br. WH reject the vs.]; εἰς πόλεμον, Rey. ix. 9; of those who run in a race-course (ἐν σταδίῳ), 1 Co. ix. 24, 26. b. metaph.: of doctrine rapidly propagated, 2 Th. iii. 1[R.V. run]; by a metaphor taken from the runners in a race, to exert one’s self, strive hard; to spend one’s strength in performing or attaining something: Ro. ix. 16; Gal. v. 7; εἰς κενόν, Gal. ii. 2 [W. 504 (470); B. § 148, 10]; Phil. ii. 16; τὸν ἀγῶνα, Heb. xii. 1 (see ἀγών, 2); the same expression occurs in Grk. writ., denoting to incur extreme peril, which it requires the exertion of all one’s efforts to overcome, Hat. 8, 102; Eur.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

τρέχω in the lit. sense ‘‘ run” occurs in a criminal process of an Alexandrian gymnasiarch before the Emperor Commodus, P Oxy I. 33 versoiii12 (= Chrest. I. p. 35) © ἠβό[κατο]ς εὐθὺς δραμὼν παρέθετο [τῷ] κυρίῳ λέγων, “‘Kipte, κάθῃ, “Ῥωμαῖοι γονγύζο[υσ]ι,᾿ “the veteran forthwith ran and told his lord, saying, ‘ Lord, while you are sitting in judgment, the Romans are murmuring.’’” The same document shows τρέχω in its derived sense ‘‘ strive” —! 1 τρέχε, τέκνον, τελεύτα. κλέος σοί ἐστιν ὑπὲρ τῆς γλυκυτάτης σου πατρίδος τελευτῆσαι, ‘onward, my son, to death, it is a glory for you to die for your beloved country” (Edd.). See also P Lond 1307? (horoscope—i/ii A.D.) (=I. p. 135) μοίρας ἔτρεχε δεκατρεῖς, and J/enandrea p. 73} ἵν᾿ ἀναπηδήσας τρέχῃ, ‘‘that he might jump up and come at a run.” We may add a wooden tablet, apparently for school use, published in Afé/. Weco/e p. 181 (= Katbel Praef.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

τρέχω (trechō) — to run.

τρέχω,

[Refs 8th c.BC+]future θρέξομαι (ἀπο-) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; θρέξω only in [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; but ἀπο-θρέξεις [Refs 5th c.BC+]aorist 1 ἔθρεξα (see. below):—but the usual future and aorist come from the root δραμ-, i.e. δρᾰμοῦμαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ionic dialect δραμέομαι [LXX+6th c.BC+]; δράμομαι in compound ἀναδράμεται [Refs 1st c.AD+]aorist 2 ἔδρᾰμον (see. below): perfect δεδράμηκα [ᾰ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]pluperfect ἐδεδραμήκεσαν (κατ-) [Refs 5th c.BC+]perfect δέδρομα (ἀνα-, ἐπι-) [Refs 8th c.BC+] —passive, perfect δεδράμημαι (ἐπι-) [Refs 5th c.BC+]—The Verb is not common in [Refs 8th c.BC+], who has present in [Refs 8th c.BC+] was also old Attic dialect, epigram cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but the common aorist was ἔδραμον, [Refs 8th c.BC+]—Doric dialect τράχω [ᾰ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]: future θραξοῦμαι [Refs 5th c.AD+]:—run, of men, ἰθὺς δράμε [Refs 8th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

τρέχω

trecho

apparently a primary verb (properly, threcho; compare 2359); which

uses dremo drem'-o (the base of 1408) as alternate in certain tenses;

to run or walk hastily (literally or figuratively):--have course, run.

see GREEK for 2359

see GREEK for 1408

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

τρέχω

v.

I run, exercise myself

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

τρέχω trechō 20x

to run, Mt. 27:48; 28:8; to run a race, 1 Cor. 9:24; met. 1 Cor. 9:24, 26; Heb. 12:1; in NT to run a certain course of conduct, Gal. 5:7; to run a course of exertion, Rom. 9:16; Gal. 2:2; Phil. 2:16; to run, to progress freely, to advance rapidly, 2 Thess. 3:1

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

τρέχω δραμοῦμαι and ἔδραμον from Root ΔΡΕΜ or ΔΡΑΜ to run, Lat. curro, Hom., etc.:—of horses, Il.:—of things, to run, move quickly, Hom., etc.

c. acc. loci, to run over, Eur., Xen.

c. acc. cogn., τρ. δρόμον, ἀγῶνα to run a course, a heat, Eur., etc.: often metaph., ἀγῶνα δρ. to run a risk, id. Eur.; πολλοὺς ἀγῶνας δραμεῖν περὶ σφέων αὐτέων to run many risks for their lives, Hdt.:—sometimes the acc. is omitted, τρ. περὶ ἑωυτοῦ to run the risk of his life, id. Eur.; τρ. περὶ τῆς νίκης Xen.

παρ᾽ ἓν πάλαισμα ἔδραμε νικᾶν he was within one bout of carrying off the victory, Hdt.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-2AAI-1S — Verb · second aorist · active · indicative · first person · singular
second aorist active indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-2AAI-1S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: second Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: first Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
15%running
running15% · 3×having run15% · 3×run10% · 2×he ran10% · 2×do run5% · 1×i may be running5% · 1×have run5% · 1×you were running5% · 1×other renderings30% · 6×

20 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 14 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb95%adverbial5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 20 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
οὕτωthus, so, in this ma
βραβεῖονa prizeτοίνυνDisj
κενόςempty, vain, hollow
εἰς
εὐθέωςimmediately, soon
καίand, even, also,
μέγας
χαράjoy, gladness
μακρόθενfrom a distance
ἀπό
τρέχωhave run.20×
what comes after →
εἷςone
ἐκδέbut, on the othe
καίand, even, also, nam
προσκυνέωI worshipδοξάζωI glorify, honor
δέbut, on the other ha
τὶςArticle the
ἀπαγγέλλωI report, bring a re
Article the
ἐπιπίπτωI fall upon, press u
ἐπί

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceτρέχω · 20× in the New Testament
1 Corinthians Galatians John Luke Matthew Mark 2 Thessalonians Hebrews Philippians Revelation Romans
Across the New Testament11 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 25 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Polycarp
Philo of AlexandriaOn Joseph 200c. AD 40

κατευξάμενος δ’ ἐκείνῳ καὶ θεοφιλέστατον προσειπών, τὸν ὁμομήτριον περιβλεψάμενος ἀδελφὸν ὡς εἶδεν, οὐ κατασχὼν ἀλλ’ ἤδη νικώμενος ὑπὸ τοῦ πάθους, πρὶν γενέσθαι καταφανής, ἐπιστρέφεται καὶ δραμὼν πρόφασιν ἐπί τι τῶν κατεπειγόντων—ἐκλαλῆσαι γὰρ…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 6.14c. AD 75–95

θέρους γὰρ ὥρᾳ πάντες ἐπὶ τὴν συγκομιδὴν τῶν καρπῶν ἐν ταῖς ἀρούραις ὑπάρχοντες ὡς εἶδον τὴν κιβωτὸν ὑφʼ ἡδονῆς ἁρπαγέντες καὶ τὸ ἔργον ἐκ τῶν χειρῶν ἀφέντες ἔδραμον εὐθὺς ἐπὶ τὴν ἅμαξαν.

PolycarpPolycarp to the Philippians 9.2c. AD 110

πεπεισμένους ὅτι οὗτοι πάντες οὐκ εἰς κενὸν ἔδραμον, ἀλλ̓ ἐν πίστει καὶ δικαιοσύνῃ, καὶ ὅτι εἰς τὸν ὀφειλόμενον αὐτοῖς τόπον εἰσὶ παρὰ τῷ κυρίῳ, ᾧ καὶ συνέπαθον.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. BC
P.Col. 4 115 eArsinoites (?)276 BC–227 BC

χαίρειν. … ν πωλεῖσθαι … ἐν Κροκοδίλων πόλει χόρτον. καλῶς οὖν ποιήσεις … αν δραμὼν περὶ τῆς … … … … … ἵπποι τ … … ολωι … ἀπεστείλαμεν

Sources on this page. Lexicons and dictionaries imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones, Robinson and Packard, Webster and Cawdrey. Thayer’s Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament (Harper, 1889 — Grimm’s Wilke’s Clavis Novi Testamenti, translated, revised and enlarged by Joseph Henry Thayer) is public domain and is set here from the Internet Archive page scan greekenglishlex00grim; it is uncorrected OCR, marked as such on the entry itself, and the Strong’s numbers — which Thayer’s own edition does not carry — were matched by lemma against the other modules on this page. Trench’s Synonyms of the New Testament (Macmillan, 1880) and Moulton and Milligan’s Vocabulary of the Greek Testament (Hodder & Stoughton, 1930, which entered the United States public domain on 1 January 2026) are set from Internet Archive page scans synonymsofnewtes00treniala and vocabularyofgree00mouluoft, and are likewise uncorrected OCR matched to Strong’s numbers by lemma. Trench treats a group of words at once, so the same essay stands on the page of each word it compares. The Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary is © 1993 and is used here by permission for non-commercial use, www.teknia.com/greek-dictionary. The full Liddell-Scott-Jones and the Hebrew word data (TAHOT) come from STEPBible.org, CC BY 4.0. Brown-Driver-Briggs is the OpenScriptures digitisation, public domain. Syntax analysis is the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (biblicalhumanities.org); the concordance and morphology are built from the tagged Nestle 1904 text. Septuagint occurrences use the Open Scriptures Septuagint lemma index, derived from CCAT (University of Pennsylvania) and the Rahlfs 1935 dataset by Eliran Wong, CC BY-NC-SA 4.0 — used here on a non-commercial ministry site. Greek of Josephus and Barnabas from the Perseus Digital Library, CC BY-SA 4.0. Commentaries and the Ante-Nicene Fathers are public-domain texts hosted on this site. Everyday Greek from the Duke Databank of Documentary Papyri, CC BY 3.0, with dates and provenance from the Heidelberger Gesamtverzeichnis. Philo and the Apostolic Fathers from Open Greek and Latin (First1KGreek), CC BY-SA 4.0. The apparatus and the fifth Greek column are the SBL Greek New Testament, © 2010 SBL and Logos Bible Software, CC BY 4.0. The Latin is the Clementine Vulgate (public domain); the Syriac New Testament is the ETCBC edition (MIT licence). The Hebrew behind the Greek is computed here from the Septuagint index and TAHOT, not taken from any aligned edition. The translation spread and the per-word edition marks come from the Translators Amalgamated Greek NT (STEPBible, CC BY 4.0); clause roles from the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (CC BY-SA 4.0); place identifications and their confidence from OpenBible.info Bible Geocoding (CC BY 4.0), with map tiles © OpenStreetMap contributors. Gospel parallels are computed here from shared uncommon vocabulary, not taken from any printed harmony. Cross references are the Treasury of Scripture Knowledge and the subject headings are Nave’s Topical Bible, both public domain. Works under Creative Commons licences are used unchanged apart from markup removal.

Everything we make is available for free because of a generous community of supporters.

Donate